DPWH Blue Book Version 3

REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES
DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY BONIFACIO DRIVE, PORT

AREA MANILA
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR

PUBLIC WORKS STRUCTURES VOLUME
III
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS STRUCTURES (BUILDINGS, PORTS AND HARBORS, FLOOD CONTROL AND DRAINAGE
STRUCTURES AND WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS) 1995
REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND
HIGHWAYS
OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY
MANILA
FOREWORD
Prior to the merger of the Ministries of Public Highways and Public Works, the specifications for highway construction
were contained in the 1972 Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, and the specifications for public works
construction were presented in various forms and styles and contained in as many volumes as those representing
the various types of public works projects such as buildings, ports and harbors, flood control and drainage structures,
and water supply systems.
Since the construction of all public works and highways infrastructures is now the responsibility of one single
government agency -Department of Public Works and Highways, it has become imperative that these separate
specifications be reviewed, updated, and consolidated. For this purpose a Committee was constituted to revise and
standardize said specifications.
The results of this undertaking are now embodied in the 1995 edition of the Standard Specifications for Public Works
Structures, Volume III. These specifications have been prepared to provide all the information necessary for the
proper construction of buildings, ports and harbors, flood control and drainage structures and water supply systems.
It is incumbent upon all engineers in the DPWH to familiarize themselves with the contents of this volume and be
guided accordingly.
GREGORIO V. VIGILAR Secretary
VOLUME III
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC
WORKS STRUCTURES
(Buildings, Ports and Harbors, Flood Control and Drainage Structures and Water Supply Systems)
TABLE OF CONTENT
PAGE
DIVISION I GENERAL 1
PART A EARTHWORK 2
ITEM 800 Clearing and Grubbing 2
801 Removal of Structures and Obstructions 2
802 Excavation 2
803 Structure Excavation 2
804 Embankment 2
805 Dredging 2
806 Reclamation 5
PART B PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE WORKS 8
ITEM 900 Reinforced Concrete 8
DIVISION II BUILDINGS ; 16
PART C FINISHING 16
ITEM 1000 Termite Control Work 16
1001 Storm Drainage and Sewerage System 18
1002 Plumbing 22
1003 Carpentry and Joinery Works 31
1004 Hardware 35
1005 Steel Windows 40
1006 Steel Doors and Frames : 43
1007 Aluminum Glass Doors 46
1008 Aluminum Glass Windows 48
1009 Jalousie Windows 50
1010 Wooden Doors and Windows 52
1011 Rolling Up Doors 57
1012 Glass and Glazing 59
1013 Corrugated Metal Roofing 62
1014 Prepainted Metal Sheets 67
1015 Clay Roof Tile 70
1016 Waterproofing 72
1017 -Roof Drains with Strainers 77
1018 -Ceramic Tiles 78
1019 -Wood Tiles : 82
1020 -Vinyl Floor Tiles 84
1021 -Cement Floor Finish 86
1022 -Stucco Finish 88
1023 -Granolithic Marb[e Work 90
1024 -Pea Gravel Washout Finish 91
1025 -Bush Hammered Finish 93
1026 -Pebble Washout Finish 95
1027 -Cement Plaster Finish 98
1028 -Synthetic Adobe 100
1029 -Granatite Washout Finish 102
1030 -Accoustical Ceiling 104
1031 -Accoustical Treatment 106
1032 -Painting. Varnishing and Other Related

108
Works
PART D ELECTRICAL 113

ITEM 1100 Conduits, Boxes and Fittings 113
1101 Wires and Wiring Devices 116
1102 Power Load Center, Switchgear and Panel Boards 118
PART E MECHANICAL 123
ITEM 1200 Air Conditioning and Refrigeration System 126
1201 Water Pumping System 126
1202 Automatic Water Sprinkler System 128
1203 Electric Elevator 132
1204 Electric Dumbwaiter 135
1205 Oxygen, Nitrous Oxide, Vacuum and Fuel Gas System 137
1206 Heating System 140
1207 Boiler 142
DIVISION II PORTS AND HARBORS 146
PART F – PILING ………………………………………………… 146
ITEM 1300 Piling To Include Sheet Piling 146
1301 Test Pile 156
PART G PROTECTIVE WORKS AND ACCESSORIES 158
ITEM 1400: Mooring Fixtures 158
1401 Timber Waling 160
1402 Fender Clusters and Dolphins 161
1403 Rubber Dock Fenders 163
1404 Filter Fabric 164
1405 Reinforcing Mat 166
1406 Deflector Wall Bulkhead Curbs and Stair Landing 167
PART H BULKHEADS 169
ITEM 1500 Sand Mattress 169
1501 Rockworks 170
1502 Filter Materials 172
1503 Excavation For Bulkheads and Reclamation 174
DIVISION IV FLOOD CONTROL, DRAINAGE AND WATER SUPPLY 176
PART I WATER SUPPLY 176
ITEM 1600 Excavation 176
1601 Backfill and Fill 178
1602 Installation of Pipeline 179
1603 Installation of Valves 186
PART J FLOOD CONTROL AND DRAINAGE 188
PART I A Earthwork 188
ITEM 1700 Clearing and Grubbing 188
1701 Channel Excavation 188
1702 Structure Excavation 189
1703 Dredging 189
1704 Embankment 192
1705 Fill and Backfill 196
1706 Hauling and Disposal/Overhaul 196
1707 Aggregate Subbase Course 196
1708 Aggregate Base Course 196
1709 Crushed Aggregate Base Course 196
PART I B Bank and Slope Protection Works 196
ITEM 1710 Riprap and Grouted Riprap 196
1711 Stone Masonry 196
1712 Concrete Slope Protection 196
1713 Rubble Concrete/Sand or Stone Masonry 196
1714 Gabions 196
1715 Filter Fabric 196
1716 Piling 196
1717 Sheet Piles 197
PART I C Drainage Works 197
ITEM 1718 Pipe Culverts and Storm Drains 197
1719 Underdrains 197
1720 Manholes, Inlets and Catch Basins 197
1721 Cleaning and Reconditioning Existing Drainage Structures 197
VOLUME III
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC
WORKS
STRUCTURES
(Buildings, Ports and Harbors, Flood Control and Drainage Structures and Water Supply Systems)
Division I -General
These Specifications cover public works construction such as buildings, flood control and drainage structures,
portworks and water supply systems including auxiliary/related structures and mechanical-electrical systems.
Unless otherwise provided herein, all applicable provisions of Volume II -Standard Specifications for Highways,
Bridges and Airports shall be adopted for the construction of the aforementioned structures.
PART A -EARTHWORK
ITEM 800 –CLEARING AND GRUBBING
Refer to Item 100, Part C of Volume II (Blue Book)
ITEM 801 -REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS

ITEM 802 – EXCAVATION

ITEM 803 – STRUCTURE EXCAVATION

ITEM 804 – EMBANKMENT

ITEM 805 – DREDGING
805.1 Description
This item shall consist of the excavation of seabeds, river beds, bottoms of creeks or esteros, and other bodies of
water for the purpose of deepening or removing of silt or any unsuitable materials or soil layers up to the required
bottom elevation and grade line and disposal of same at areas indicated on the Plans or as designated by the
assigned Project Engineer.
805.2 Construction Requirements
805.2.1 Construction Survey and Reference Elevation
All elevation shall be referred to the mean lower low water (MLLW) elevation 0.00
A construction survey shall be undertaken by the Contractor under the control of the designated/assigned Engineer
to serve as basis for the computation of the actual volume of dredged materials.
805.2.2 Equipment
The contractor shall furnish all the necessary dredging equipment to assure satisfactory prosecution of the work.
805.2.3 Execution of the Work
The dredging work shall be undertaken by the Contractor starting from the downstream section or within the limits
indicated on the Plans and in accordance with the Specifications and approved work schedule.
805.2.4 Materials to be Dredged
All available data regarding the materials to be dredged are given in the soil investigation reports and as indicated in
the boring logs on the Plans. Materials to be dredged may range from muck, sandy loam to coral.
The contractor may at his own initiative verify or check at his own expense all the data regarding the materials to be
encountered. He shall not be entitled to any claim against the government in case of incorrect interpretation of the
borings or laboratory test results of the soil investigation.
805.2.5 Dredging Tolerances (Over depth)
The dredging shall be executed according to the depths or elevations indicated on the Plans. No elevation higher
than the indicated elevation shall be tolerated. An allowance of 300 mm shall be acceptable for overdredging, but in
no case shall the entire dredging area shall be dredged to the allowable 300 mm tolerance. All quantities due to
overdredging shall be at the Contractor's expense.
In case of excessive overdredging (beyond the 300 mrn tolerance) the Contractor shall on his account backfill the
overdredged areas and/ or take all necessary measures as approved by the Engineer to protect the stability of
nearby structures.
805.2.6 Dredging Slopes
All dredging slopes shall be to the specified gradient and within the limits specified on the Plans.
805.2.7 Dredging Basins
The theoretical boundaries of dredging are shown on the Plans. The dredging shall be carried out to the specified
depth with the permissible overdredging specified in Sub Section 805.2.5.
The preferred degree of slopes between the original bottom and the indicated dredging level is 1 (vertical) to 4
(horizontal) for layers of clay and 1 to 6 for layers of sand and silty sand and 1 to 10 for layers of rnud or silt.
805.2.8 Dredging Adjacent Waterfront Structures
In addition to the requirements mentioned in Subsection 805.2.7 the following shall apply for dredging carried out
adjacent waterfront structures:
· (a) The maximum permissible overdredging is 300 mm within the strip defined in (d).
· (b) Dredging adjacent to any part of sheet pile walls on the berm specified in (d) shall be
carried out to the depth specified without overdredging.
· (c) Dredging adjacent to any part of Rock bulkhead or Rock breakwater shall not be
allowed within the specified in (d). Dredging adjacent to any structure provided with toe
protection shall not be deeper than the level of the toe protection or as specified on the Plans.
· (d) The limits of strip or berm mentioned in (a), (b) and (c) are as follows:
· -Berm from the quayline or toe of a rock mound structure to the basin infront.
· -Strip-from the outside limit of the berm and further out the basin.
· -The width of the berm and strip shall be as follows:
Berm Strip
Rubble Mound
5m 10m
Structure
Sheet Pile Walls 3m 20m

(e) Dredging outside the strip may proceed in accordance with sub-section
805.2.5.
The contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety of any permanent structures on the site. During the dredging
operations, the sheet pile walls shall be observed regularly for deflection of the top edge.Temporary and permanent
bench marks and reference points shall be established for determining possible movements of waterfront structures.
805.2.9 Disposal of Spoils
All unsuitable dredged materials shall be dumped at the spoil EJea shown on the Plans or into the open sea as
directed by the designated/ assigned Project Engineer.
Good quality dredged material shall be dumped in reclaimed areas in accordance with Item 806, Reclamation.
Excess quantities shall be deposited at areas as designated by the Engineer.
805.2.10 Articles of Value or Wreckage
Articles of value, wreakage or obstructions discovered on the site shall be reported by the contractor in writing to the
Engineer who in turn shall consult with the proper agency/official concerned for their proper disposal.
805.3 Method of Measurement
The Engineer shall verify that the dredging between the pre and post dredging surveys, subjected to the condition of
subsection 805.2.5, Dredging Tolerances.
805.4 Basis of Payment
The cost of dredging shall be paid based on the computed volume of drp.dged materials multiplied by the contract
unit price for the particular pay item shown in the Bid Schc·jule, which price and payment shallconstitute full
compensation for dredging, handling and disposal including labor, equipment, tools and iricidentals necessary to
complete this item.
Payment Item Description Pay Unit
805 (1) Dredging – soils m3
Dredging -coral
805 (2) m3
material
ITEM 806 -RECLAMATION

806.1 Description
This item shall consist of introducing suitable filling materials obtained from dredging the sea or river beds or
obtained from authorized borrow areas situated beyond the right-of-way limits of the project at locations designated
by the Engineer and placed as required within the area to be reclaimed and to the required elevation. The materials
shall be of a quality satisfactory for the purpose intended. Reclamation shall include the clearing and grubbing of
sites and the removal of all undesirable materials.
806.2 Materials Requirements

Filling materials shall consist of all types of earthen materials such as soil, gravel, sand, shells, corals, cinders and
rock of any geologic origin and any additional filler for blending which have distinctive properties readily identified in
the field and have distinct engineering characteristics of which practical use can be made. Materials such as weeds,
silt, muck and other superfluous or organic materials are not considered suitable materials for reclamation.

806.3.1 By Dredging
Dredged material shall be secured from the dredging limits as shown on the plans or from other sources
recommended by the designated/ assigned Engineer. The materials dredged shall be transported and deposited at
the area to be filled or as directed by the Engineer. Suitable dredges and attendant plantwith which to dredge,
transport and deposit the material shall be used.
Silt and mud shall not be allowed to accumulate at the reclamation area but shall be allowed to flow freely towards
the spillway which the contractor shall construct for the purpose. Should mud pools be formed, the Contractor shall
be required to remove the mud accumulated.
806.3.2 By Borrow
Borrow material shall be secured from land sources recommended as borrow outside the limits of the project or at
locations/sites approved by the Engineer. Borrow material may be used to supplement the materials obtained by
dredging. Contractor shall construct and maintain haul roads.The contractor shall secure borrow from sources other
than those designated, provided that the materials and location are approved by the Engineer, in which case, the
Contractor shall, at his own expense, secure the pit and construct and maintain the haul roads together with the
necessary right-of-way for such roads and the right-of-access thereto.
The materials shall be hauled and placed in positions on the reclamation indicated on the plans.
Borrow pits when practicable shall be so excavated that they will drain to the nearest natural outlet or to such outlet
as indicated on the plans or designated by the Engineer. Side slopes of borrow puts in all cases shall be dressed to
such slope as the Engineer may direct.
Compaction Requirement
The materials above MLLW whether obtained by dredging or from borrow pits shall be spread out and compacted in
layers not exceeding 300 mm preferably by at least six passes of a vibratory roller of at least 8 tonne drawn by a
tractor. The fill shall be compacted to not less than 90% of standard proctor test requirement.
In case there is a layer of very compressible clay of variable thickness underneath the areas to be reclaimed, the
filling immediately on top of the original sea or river beds shall be executed in thin layers not exceeding one metre
spread over a wide area to avoid bulging of the soft compressible clay, until the MLLW elevation is reached. If in spite
of this precaution, some clay eruption are observed on the fill material, this clay will be removed down to the
elevation of the original sea or river bed and replaced with good material. In the event that the top sea or river bed
material is composed of soft silt, muck or organic material, the Contractor shall remove such soft material prior to
filling or filling operation should be programmed so that the soft material can be pushed out of the reclamation area
as directed by the designated/assigned Project Engineer. The reclamation area shall be filled to the finished elevation
shown on the plan plus allowance for expected settlement. Filling of the reclamation area and the construction of the
bulkheads shall be given top priority over other construction activities.

Reclamation fill will be measured by the volume in cubic metre by the cross section average end area method in its
completed position, placed, consolidated and for fill above water level compacted. The quantity computed from actual
cross sections to the finished grade shall be corrected by applying the anticipated settlement for a one-year period
after reclamation determined by laboratory test of the sample of soil borings to get its volume measurement at
completed position. No shrinkage factor correction shall be applied to the quantity as computed above.The basis of
computation shall be the approved construction survey conducted by the Contractor in the presence of the
designated/assigned Project Engineer.

The accepted quantities as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic metre of fill in its
completed position in the reclamation which price and payment except as otherwise provided shall be full
compensation for materials, labor, excavating, dredging, hauling, placing, compacting, equipment, tools, test and
incidentals necessary to complete the item.
Pay Item No and Description Unit of Measurement
Reclamation Cubic Metre
PART B -PLAIN AND REINFORCED

CONCRETE WORK
ITEM 900 -REINFORCED CONCRETE
900.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing, placing and finishing concrete in buildings and related structures, flood control
and drainage, ports, and water supply structures in accordance with this specification and conforming to the lines,
grades, and dimension shown on the plans.

900.2.1 Portland Cement
This shall conform to the requirement of ITEM 700, Volume II (BlueBook), Hydraulic cement.
900.2.2 Concrete Aggregates
Concrete aggregate shall conform to the requirements of subsection 311.2.2 and 311.2.3 under Item 311 of Volume
II, (Blue Book) and ASTM C 33 for lightweight aggregates, except that aggregates failing to meet these specifications
but which have been shown by special that or actual service to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability
may be used under method (2) of determining the proportion of concrete, where authorized by the Engineer.
Except as permitted elsewhere in this section, the maximum size of the aggregate shall be not larger than one-fifth
(1/5) of the narrowest dimensions between sides of forms of the member for which the concrete is to be used nor
larger than three-fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars or
pretensioning strands.
900.2.2.1 Aggregate Tests
Samples of the fine and coarse aggregates to be used shall be selected by the Engineer for tests at least 30 days
before the actual concreting operations are to begin. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to designate the
source or sources of aggregate to give the Engineer sufficient time to obtain the necessary samples and submit them
for testing.
No aggregate shall be used until official advice has been received that it has satisfactorily passed all test, at which
time written authority shall be given 'for its use.
900.2.3 Water
Water used in mixing concrete shall conform to the requirement of subsection 311.2.4 under Item 311, Part E,of
Volume II, (BlueBook).
900.2.4 Metal Reinforcement
Reinforcing steel bars shall conform to the requirements of the following Specifications:
Deformed & Plain Billet Steel Bars for concrete Reinforcement (ASTM A 615)
Bars for concrete Reinforcement AASHTO M 31
Deformed Rail -Steel and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A 616
Deformed A x b -Steel and Plain Bars for Concrete

ASTM A 617
Reinforcement
If reinforcing bars are to be welded, these ASTM specifications shall be supplemented by requirements assuring
satisfactory weldability.
Bar and rod mats for concrete

ASTM A 187
reinforcement
Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for (ASTM A 82)
concrete reinforcement AASHTO M 32
Welded steel wire fabric (ASTM A 185)
for concrete reinforcement AASHTO M55 except that the weld shear strength requirement of those specification shall
be extended to include a wire size differential up to and including six gages.
Wire and Strands for

ASTM A 416
prestressed
concrete ASTM A 421
Used in making strands for post-tensioning shall be cold-drawn and either stress-relieved in the case of uncoated
strands, or hotdip galvanized in the case of galvanized strands.
High strength alloy steel bar for post-tensioning shall be proofstressed to 90 % of the granted tensile strength. After
proofstressing, the bars shall conform to the following minimum properties:
Tensile strength fs' 1000 MPa
Yield strength (0.2 offset) 0.90 fs'
Elongation at rupture in 20 diameter 4 percent
Reduction of area at rupture 25 percent
Structural steel ASTM A 36
Steel Pipe for concrete-filled pipe columns ASTM A 53
Cast-Iron Pipe for composite columns ASTM A 377
900.2.5 Admixtures
Air-entraining admixtures, if used, shall conform to ASTM C 260.
Water-reducing admixtures, retarding ad-mixtures, water-reducing and retarding admixtures and water reducing and
accelerating admixtures, if used, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 494.
900.2.6 Storage of Materials
Cement and aggregates shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent their deterioration or the intrusion of foreign
matter. Cement shall be stored, immediately upon arrival on the site of the work, in substantial, waterproof bodegas,
with a floor raised from the ground sufficiently high to be free from dampness. Aggregates shall be stored in such a
manner as to avoid the inclusion of foreign materials.

Notations: The notations used in these regulations are defined as follows:
f'c = compressive strength of concrete
Fsp = ratio of splitting tensile strength to square root of compressive strength.
900.3.1 Concrete Quality
All plans submitted for approval or used for any project shall clearly show the specified strength, fc', of concrete of the
specified age for which each part of the structure was designed.
Concrete that will be exposed to sulfate containing or other chemically aggressive solutions shall be proportioned in
accordance with "Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Concrete (ACI 613)" and Recommended
Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete (ACI 613A)."
900.3.2 Methods of Determining the Proportions of Concrete
The determination of the proportions of cement, aggregate, and water to attain the required strengths shall be made
by one of the following methods, but lower water-cement ratios may be required for conformance__ with the quality of
concrete.
Method 1, Without preliminary test
Where preliminary test data on the materials to be used in the concrete have not been obtained the water-cement
ratio for a given strength of concrete shall not exceed the values shown in Table 900.1.' When strengths-in excess bf
281 kilograms per square centimeter (4000 pounds per square inch) are required or when light weight aggregates or'
admixtures (other than those exclusively for the purpose of entraining -air) are used, the required water-cement ratio
shall be determined in accordance with Method 2.
Method 2. For combination of materials previously evaluated or to be established by trial mixtures.
Water-cement ratios for strengths greater than that shown in Table I 900.1 may be used provided that the
relationship between strength and I water-cement ratio for the materials to be used has been previously established
by reliable test data and the resulting concrete satisfies the . requirements of concrete quality.
Where previous data are not available. Concrete trial mixtures having proportions and consistency suitable for the
work shall be made using at least three different water-cement ratios (or cement content in I the case of lightweight
aggregates) which will produce a range of strengths encompassing those required for the work. For each water-
cement ratio (or cement content) at least three specimens for each age to be tested shall be made, cured and tested
for strength in accordance with ASTM C 39 and C 192.
The strength test shall be made at 7, 14 and 28 days at which the concrete is to receive load, as indicated on the
plans. A curve shall be established showing the relationship between water-cement ratio (or cement content) and
compressive strength. The maximum permissible water-cement ratio for the concrete to be used in the structure shall
be that shown by the curve to produce an average strength to satisfy the requirements of the strength test of
concrete provided that the water-cement ratio shall be no' greater than that required by concrete quality when
concrete that is to be subjected to the freezing temperatures which weight shall have a water-cement ratio not
exceeding 6 gal per bag and it shall contain entrained air.
Where different materials are to be used for different portions of the work, each combination shall be evaluated
separately.
TABLE 900.1 MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WATER-CEMENT RATIOS FOR CONCRETE (METHOD NO.1)
Maximum permissible water-cement ratio
Specified compressive Non air-entrained concrete Air-entrained concrete

strength at 28 days, psi fc
U.S. gal. per 42.6 kg. Absolute ratio U.S. gal per 42.6 kg. Absolute ratio
bag of cement by weight bag of cement by weight
2500 7¼ 0.642 6¼ 0.554
3000 6½ 0.576 5¼ 0.465
3500 5¾ 0.510 4½ 0.399
4000 5 0.443 4 0.354
900.3.3 Concrete Proportions and Consistency

The proportions of aggregate to cement for any concrete shall be such as to produce a mixture which will work
readily into the corners and angles of the form and around reinforcement with the method of placing employed on the
work, but without permitting the materials to segregate or excess free water to collect on the surface. The methods of
measuring concrete materials shall be such that the proportions can be accurately controlled and easily checked at
any time during the work.
900.3.4 Sampling and Testing of Structural Concrete
As work progress, at least one (1) set of sample consisting of three (3) concrete cylinder test specimens, 150 x 300
mm shall be taken from each class of concrete placed each day, and each set to represent not more than 75 cu m of
concrete.
900.3.5 Consistency
Concrete shall have a consistency such that it will be workable in the required position. It shall be such a consistency
that it will flow around reinforcing steel but individual particles of the coarse aggregate when isolated shall show a
coating or mortar containing its proportionate amount of sand. The consistency of concrete shall be gauged by the
ability of the equipment to properly placed it and not by the difficulty of mixing water shall be determined by the
Engineer and shall not be varied without his consent. Concrete as dry as it is practical to place with the equipment
specified shall be used.
900.3.6 Strength Test of Concrete
When strength is a basis for acceptance, each class of concrete shall be represented by at least five test (10
specimens). Two specimens shall be made for each test at a given age, and not less than one test shall be made for
each 150 cu yd of structural concrete, but there shall be at least one test for each days concreting. The Building
Official may require a reasonable number of additional tests during the progress of the work. Samples from which
compression test specimens are molded shall be secured in accordance with ASTM C 172. Specimens made to
check the adequacy of the proportions for strength of concrete or as a basis for acceptance of concrete shall be
made and laboratory-cured in accordance with ASTM C 31. Additional test specimens cured entirely under field
conditions may be required by the Building Official to check the adequacy of curing and protection of the concrete.
Strength tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C 39.
The age for strength tests shall be 28 days Of, where specified, the earlier age at which the concrete is to receive its
full load or maximum j stress. Additional test may be made at earlier ages to obtain advance information on the
adequacy of strength development where age-strength relationships have been established for the materials and
proportions used.
To conform to the requirements of this Item:
· 1. For structures designed in accordance with the working stress design method of this
chapter, the average of any five consecutive strength tests of the laboratory-cured specimens
representing each class of concrete shall be equal on or greater than the specified strength,
fc', and not more than 20 percent of the strength test shall have values less than that
specified.
· 2. For structures designed in accordance with the ultimate strength design method of this
chapter, and for prestressed structures the average of any three consecutive strength test of
the laboratory, cured specimens representing each class of concrete shall be equal to or
greater than the specified strength, fc' and not more than 10 percent of the strength tests shall
have values less than the specified strength.
When it appears that the laboratory-cured specimens will fail to conform to the requirements for strength, the
Engineer shall have the right to order changes in the concrete sufficient to increase the strength to meet these
requirements. The strengths of the specimens cured on the job are intended to indicate the adequacy of protection
and curing of the concrete and may be used to determine when the forms may be stripped, shoring removed, or the
structure placed in service. When, in the opinion of the Building Official, the strengths of the job-cured specimens, the
contractor may be required to improve the procedures for protecting and curing the concrete, or when test of field-
cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in protection and curing, the Engineer may require test in accordance with
ASTM Specification C 42 or order load tests as outlined in the load tests of structures for that portion of the structure
where the questionable concrete has been placed.
900.3.7 Splitting Tensile Test of Concrete
To determine the splitting ratio, Fsp, for a particular aggregate, test of concrete shall be made as follows:
· 1. Twenty four (24) 15 cm. dia. by 30 cm long (6 in. dia. by 12 in. long) cylinders shall be
made in accordance with ASTM C 192, twelve at a compressive strength level of
approximately 210 kilograms per square centimeter (3000 psi) and twelve at approximately
280 kilograms per square centimeter (4000 psi) or 350 kilograms per square centimeter (5000
psi). After 7 days moist curing followed by 21 days drying at 23C (73F) and 50 percent
relative humidity, eight of the test cylinders at each of the two strength levels shall be tested
for splitting strength and four for compressive strength.
· 2. The splitting tensile strength shall be determine in accordance with ASTM C 496, and
compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 39.
The ratio, Fsp, of splitting tensile strength to the square root of compressive strength shall be obtained by using the
average of all 16 splitting tensile test and all 8 compressive tests.
Minimum Strength, Concrete other than fill, shall have a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 140 kilograms
per square centimeter (2000 psi).
900.3.8 Batching
Batching shall conform to the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete.
900.3.9 Mixing and Delivery
Mixing and delivery shall conform to the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete.
900.4 Concrete Surface Finishing: General

This shall be in accordance with Item 407, Concrete Structures.
900.5 Curing Concrete (See subsection 407)

900.6 Acceptance of Concrete
The strength of concrete shall be deemed acceptable if the average of 3 consecutive strength test results is equal to
or exceed the specified strength and no individual test result falls below the specified strength by more than 15 %.
Concrete deemed to be not acceptable using the above criteria may be rejected unless contractor can provide
evidence, by means of core tests, that the quality of concrete represented by the failed test result is acceptable in
place. Three (3) cores shall be obtained from the affected area and cured and tested in accordance with AASHTO
T24.
Concrete in the area represented by the cores will be deemed acceptable if the average of cores is equal to or at
least 85 % and no sample core is less than 75 % of the specified strength otherwise it shall be rejected.

The quantity of concrete to be paid shall be the quantity shown in the Bid Schedule, unless changes in design are
made in which case the quantity shown in the Bid Schedule will be adjusted by the amount of the change for the
purpose of payment. No deduction will be made for the volume occupied by the pipe less than 101 mm (4") in
diameter nor for reinforcing steel. anchors, weepholes or expansion materials.

The accepted quantities of structural concrete completed in place will be paid for at the contract unit price for cubic
meter as indicated on the Bid Schedule.
Pay Item and Description Unit of measurement
Structural Concrete Cubic Meter
Such prices and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, including metal water stops, joints,
joint fillers, weep holes, and rock backing and timber bumpers; for all form and false work; for mixing, placing,
furnishing, and curing the concrete; and for all labor, materials, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete the item, except that reinforcing steel shall be paid for at the contract unit price per kilogram for reinforcing
steel metal pipes and drains, metal conduits and ducts, and metal expansion angles shall be paid for as structural
steel that when the proposal does not include an item for structural steel these miscellaneous metal parts shall be
paid for as reinforcing steel.
DIVISION II -BUILDINGS
PART C -FINISHING
ITEM 1000 -TERMITE CONTROL WORK
1000.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and applying termite control chemicals, including the use of equipment and tools
in performing such operations in accordance with this Specification.
1000.2 Material Requirements
Termite control chemicals or toxicants shall be able to immediately exterminate termites or create barriers to
discourage entry of subterranean termites into the building areas. The toxicants may be classified into the following
types and according to use:
Type I. Liquid Termicide Concentrate
This type of toxicant shall be specified for drenching soil beneath foundations of proposed buildings. The concentrate
shall be diluted with water in the proportion of 1 liter of concentrate material to 65 liters of water or as specified by the
Manufacturer.
Type II. Liquid Termicide Ready Mixed Solution
This type of toxicant which comes in ready mixed solution shall be ·1 used as wood preservative by drenching wood
surfaces to the point of run-off.
Type III. Powder Termicide
This type of toxicant shall be applied to visible or suspected subterranean termite mounds and tunnels where
termites are exterminated through trophallaxes method (exchange or nourishment between termites while greeting
each other upon meeting).
Before any termite control work is started, thorough examination of the site shall be undertaken so that the
appropriate method of soil poisoning can be applied.
The Contractor shall coordinate with other related trades through the Engineer to avoid delay that may arise during
the different phases of application of the termite control chemicals.
1000.3.1 Soil Poisoning

There are two methods usually adopted in soil poisoning which are as follows:
· 1. Cordoning. This method is usually adopted when there is no visible evidence of termite
infestation. Trenches in concentric circles, squares or rectangles are dug 150mm to 220mm
wide and at least one meter apart and applied with Type I working solution.at the rate of 8
liters per linear meter.
· 2. Drenching. When soil show termite infestation, this method shall be applied. The building
area shall be thoroughly drenched with Type I working solution at the rate of 24 liters per
square meter. When Powder Termicide is to be applied to eradicate subterranean termites,
careful application and precaution shall be given considering that this toxicant is fatal to
animal and human lives.
1000.3.2 Application
At the time soil poisoning is to be applied, the soil to be treated shall be in friable condition with low moisture content
so as to allow uniform distribution of the toxicant agents. Toxicant shall be applied at least twelve (12) hours prior to
placement of concrete which shall be in contact with treated materials.
Treatment of the soil on the exterior sides of the foundation walls, grade beams and similar structures shall be done
prior to final grading and planting or landscaping work to avoid disturbance of the toxicant barriers by such
operations.
Areas to be covered by concrete slab shall be treated before placement of granular fill used as capillary water barrier
at a rate of 12 liters per square meter with Type I working solution after it has been compacted and set to required
elevation. Additional treatment shall be· applied as follows:
· 1. In critical areas such as utility openings for pipes, conduits and ducts, apply additional
treatment at the rate of 6 liters per linear meter in a strip 150 mm to 200 mm wide.
· 2. Along the exterior perimeter of the slab and under expansion joint, at the rate of 2.5 liters
per linear meter in a strip 150 mm to 200 mm wide in a shallow trench.
1000.3.3 Wood Protection
Where the application of wood preservative is necessary, the Contractor shall use Type II working solution as
recommended by the manufacturer.
All wood materials not pressure treated as specified in Item 1003 Carpentry and Joinery shall be treated with Type II
ready mixed solution as herein called for or as directed by the Engineer.
1000.3.4 Guarantee
The contractor shall guarantee the work for one (1) year after final acceptance.
Liquid termite control chemicals or toxicants shall be measured by actual number of liters used in the cordoning and
drenching of lot areas and soil poisoning of granular fill or actual number of liters used in drenching wood surfaces,
while powder chemical/toxicant shall be measured by kilograms applied to suspected subterranean termite mounds
and tunnels.
The quantity to be paid for shall be determined and accepted by the Engineer.
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 10 shall be paid for at the Contract Unit Price for Termite
Control Work which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and applying termite control
chemicals including the use of equipment and tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed
in this Item.
Payment shall be made under:
Pay Item
Description Unit of Measurement
Number
1000 (a) Soil Poisoning Liter
1000 (b) Wood Preservative Liter
1000 (c) Powder Termicide Kilogram
ITEM 1001 -STORM DRAINAGE AND SEWERAGE SYSTEM

1001.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, equipment and labor for the complete installation of the storm
drainage system to include all piping’s, gutters, canals, catch basins, junction boxes, hand holes, manholes and other
appurtenant structures, and sewerage system to include all sanitary sewer piping and septic vault where no public
sewer exist, from the building to the point of discharge.
1001.2.1 Materials for storm drainage system shall meet the requirements specified in the following standard
specifications:
Portland Cement ASTM C-150
Fine and Coarse Aggregate ASTM C-33
Reinforcing Steel ASTM A-615
Non-reinforced Concrete Pipes ASTM C-14
Reinforced Concrete Pipes ASTM C-76 (AASHTO M-86)
Cast Iron Pipes (for conductors and

ASTM A-74
downspout)
Galvanized IronPipesScheduled 40 ASTM A-120
(for conductors and downspouts)
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) ASTM 2729
(for conductors and downspouts)

Where the covers for catch basins, junction boxes, manholes and canals for gratings are required same shall be
made of wrought iron and of the dimensions as shown on the Plans.
1001.2.2 Materials for sewerage system shall meet the requirements specified in the following standard
specifications:
Cast Iron Pipes and Fittings ASTM A-74
Pig Lead (for securing and sealing joint) ASTM B 29-77
PVC Pipes and Fittings (where called in Plans) ASTM 01784
Solvent Cement (for securing PVC joints) ASTM 02564
Where PVC pipes and fittings are used, joints shall be secured with rubber "0" ring or solvent cement, as the case
maybe.
Oakum for joints in bell and spigot pipes shall be made from hemp fiber, braided or twisted and oil impregnated free
from lumps, dirt and extraneous matter.
1001.3.1 Installation of Pipes
Under no circumstances shall pipes shall be laid under water and when the trench condition or the weather is
unsuitable for such work.
· a. Bedding. Materials such as sand, sandy soil or any approved material shall be used to
provide a firm foundation of uniform density.The bedding shall have a minimum thickness
equivalent to one-fourth (1/ 4) of the pipe's diameter.
· b. Laying of Pipes. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering and' placing pipes into
trenches in order to preclude damage. Laying of pipes shall start upgrade with the spigot end
of bell-and-spigot pipe, or the tongue end of tongue-and-groove pipe, positioned towards the
direction of the flow. The pipes shall be laid in accordance with the grades and alignments
shown in the Plans.
The spigots or tongues shall be adjusted in bells or grooves to provide
uniform space around joints to receive mortar. Blocking or wedging between
spigot and bell or between tongue and groove to attain proper spacing shall
be allowed provided such blocking/wedging shall not interfere and shall not
affect the water tightness of the joint.
· · c. Bell and Spigot Joint for Drain Pipe. The first pipe shall be properly bedded at the
required grade. Just below the spigot of the first unit,a sufficient space shall be provided for
engaging the bell end of the second pipe.
The spigot shall be carefully cleaned with a wet brush and the upper exterior
portion applied with mortar to such a thickness as to bring the inner surfaces
of the abutting pipes flush and even. The bell end of the second pipe shall be
cleaned with a wet brush and uniformly matched with the spigot of the first
pipe so that the sections are closely fitted. After the second pipe is laid, the
remainder of the joint shall be fitted with mortar, and a bead shall be formed
around the outside of the joints with sufficient amount of additional mortar.
The inside of the joints shall be wiped and finished smooth. The mortar bead
on the outside shoii immediately be protected with a cover of wet burlap or
wet earth for at least three (3) days for curing.
· · d. Tongue and Groove Joint for Concrete Pipe. The first pipe shall be properly bedded. A
shallow excavation shall be made underneath the joint and filled with mortar to provide a bed
second pipe. The tongue end of the first pipe shall be carefully cleaned with wet brush and
soft mortar applied around the upper half of the tongue. After cleaning and positioning the
second pipe close to the first, mortar shall be applied around the lower half of the groove.
With just sufficient thrust, the second pipe shall be brought in close contact with the first until
mortar is squeezed out of the joint. Sufficient mortar shall be used to fill the joint and to form a
bead on the outside.
· e. Mortar for Joint. Mortar shall be a mixture of Portland Cement, sand and water mixed in
the proportion by volume of one part cement to two parts of clean sand with just sufficient
amount of water for plasticity.
· f. Leaded Joints of Cast Iron Pipes. Joints of cast iron pipes shall be packed with braided or
twisted oil-impregnated hemp or oakum, properly caulked around the joint. The packing shall
be at least 20mm below the rim of the hub or bell and this space shall be filled with molten pig
lead in one continuous pouring. The "ring" of pig lead formed around the joint shall be
properly caulked by appropriate caulking tools to render the joints watertight.
· 1001.3.2 Concrete structures. Concrete structures such as catch basins, canal gutters,
junction boxes and manholes for the drainage system, and septic vault for sewerage system,
shall be constructed in accordance with the Plans and Specifications on Concrete Work.
1001.3.2Sewer Connections and Clean-Outs
· a.The outlet of the septic vault shall be connected to the street drain or to other discharge
point where no sanitary sewer exists. Connection with the sanitary sewer shall not be made
without the permission of the proper authorities, but shall be made in such amanner that any
and all the service water, as well as house and other liquid wastes, will flow to the sanitary
sewer. Provided, that isolated faucets used exclusively for garden purposes may, in the
discretion of the proper authorities, be allowed not to flow into the sanitary sewer.
· b. Clean-outs or rodding holes consisting of cast iron extensions with long sweep elbow
fittings shall be provided at the ends of runs and at every change of directions. Clean-outs
shall be capped with cast brass ferrules with threads and screwed-on removable brass
plugs.Clean-outs extended outside the building and raised to the level of finished grade shall
be terminated with the same cast brass ferrule with brass plug set into a concrete slab shall
be 150mm thick and 300mm square, finish flush with grade.
1001.3.4 Incidental Earthwork
Incidental earthwork for the storm drainage and sewerage systems, such as excavation and backfilling shall be
undertaken in accordance with applicable part of Excavation Filling and Grading.
1001.3.5 Inspection and Quality Control
Materials shall be inspected and accepted as to quality before same are installed. Piping’sinstalled in trenches shall
first be inspected, tested and approved by the Engineer before these are covered or backfilled. All defects/ lakes
disclosed by the water test shall be remedied to the satisfaction of the Engineer and any extra cost shall be at the
expense of the Contractor.
Pipes, culverts, gutters, canals and gratings installed in place and accepted by the Engineer, shall be measured by
the meter along their axes. Catch basins, junction boxes, manholes and septic vault shall be measured by the
number of units constructed and accepted.
The quantities as determined in sub-section 1001.4 shall be paid at the contract unit price for each of the Items which
shall constitute full compensation for all materials, labor, tools and equipment and all other incidentals necessary to
complete the Item.
Pay Item
Number
1001.2 (a) Pipe (kind and size) meter
1001.2 (b) Fitting (kind and size) each
1001.2 (c) Concrete Gutter meter
1001.2 (d) Concrete Canal meter
1001.2 (e) W. I. Grating meter
1001.2 (f) Catch Basin each
1001.2 (g) Junction Box each
ITEM 1002-PLUMBING
1002.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, tools, equipment and fixtures required as shown on the Plans for
the satisfactory performance of the entire plumbing system including installation in accordance with the latest edition
of the National Plumbing Code, and this Specification.
All piping materials, fixtures and appliances fitting accessories whether specifically mentioned or not but necessary to
complete this Item shall be furnished and installed.
1002.2.1 Cast Iron Soil Pipes and Fittings
· a. Pipes and fitting materials shall comply with the specification requirements defined in
PNS/SAO 4-1: 1974. The material description and standards of manufacture are herein
described:
· 1. Cast Iron -the casting shall be made of gray iron which shall be sound, free from cracks,
sand holes and blow holes. They shall be uniformly low hardness that permits drilling and
cutting by ordinary methods. Pipes and fittings shall be true to pattern and of compact closed
grained structure.
· 2. Quality of Iron -the iron shall be made by the cupola, air furnace, electric furnace or other
processes which shall be checked by regular chemical and physical control test. The resultant
shall be gray iron of good quality.
· 3. Manufacture -the pipes shall be made with hub and spigot ends or hub ends only. All
hubs for pipes and fittings shall be provided with held lead grooves and all spigot ends shall
be made with beads or plain if machine cast centrifugally. Plugs shall be wrought or cast,
machined to the dimensions required and shall be free from defects.
· 4. Freedom from defects -pipes and fittings shall be true, smooth and cylindrical, their inner
and outer surfaces being as nearly concentric as practicable. They shall be in all aspects,
sound and good casting free from laps, pin holes or other imperiections and shall be neatly
dressed and carefully fettled. The ends shall be finished reasonably square to their axes.
· b. Clean-outs shall be made of heavy cast brass ferrule with counter sunk screw cover same diameter as the pipe
except that they shall not be larger than 100mm diameter.
· c. Caulking lead shall be of molten type peg lead conforming to specification requirements defined in ASTM 8-29.
· d. Oakum shall be twisted or braided hemp or abaca fibers slightly impregnated with oil.
1002.2.2 WATER SUPPLY Pipes and Fittings
· a. Pipes shall be galvanized iron pipe schedule 40 conforming to specification requirements

defined in ASTM A-120 with threaded connection. Under roads where necessary shall be
suitably protected as shown on the Plans.
Fittings shall be malleable iron Type II, galvanized iron conforming to
specification requirements defined in ASTM A338.
· · b.Valves
Valves for water supply shall be bronze body with threaded ends rated 21.0 kgf/cm. square, All valves shall be gate
valves unless otherwise specified. Gate valves shall have solid wedge body and discs conforming to specification
requirements defined in ASTM 8-62. Globe valves shall have plug type discs with ferrule threaded ends and bronze
body.
· c. Unions
Unions on ferrous pipe 50mm in diameter and smaller shall be malleable iron.
· · d. Water Meter
Water meter where required to be furnished by the Contractor shall be of the type tested and approved by MWSS.
1002.2.3 Approved Alternate Pipes and Fittings
Pipes and fittings for sanitary and potable water lines as approved alternate shall be Un plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride
Pipes and Fittings (UPVC).
Pipes and fittings shall be made of virgin materials conforming to specification requirements defined in ASTM 0-2241
and PNS 65: 1986. Fittings shall be molded type and designed for solvent cement joint connection for water lines and
rubber O-ring seal joint for sanitary lines.
1002.2.4 Septic Tank
The septic tank shall be provided as shown on the Plans including all pipe vents and fittings. The various construction
materials such as concrete masonry work shall conform to the corresponding Items of these Specifications. Inlet and
outlet pipes shall conform to the latest edition of the National Plumbing Code.
1002.2.5 Plumbing Fixtures and Fittings
All fittings and trimmings for fixtures shall be chromium-plated and polished brass unless otherwise approved.
Exposed traps and supply pipes for fixtures shall be connected to the roughing in, piping system at the wall unless
otherwise indicated on the Plans. Built-in fixtures shall be watertight with provision of water supply and drainage
outlet, fittings and trap seal. Unless otherwise specified, all plumbing fixtures shall be made of vitreous china
complete with fittings.
· a.Water closet shall be vitreous china, free standing toilet combination, round front bottom
outlet symphonicwash down bowl with extended rear self and closed coupled tank with cover
complete with fittings and mounting accessories. Model make and color shall be submitted for
approval prior to delivery at jobsite by the Engineer.
· b.Lavatory shall be vitreous china, wall-hung with rear overflow and cast-in soap dishes,
pocket hanger with integral china brackets, complete with twin faucets, supply pipes, P-trap
and mounting accessories. Where indicated on the Plans to be counter top model make and
color shall be approved by the Engineer.
c.Urinal shall be china vitreous, wall-hung wash-out urinal with extended shields and integral flush spreader,
concealed wall-hanger pockets, 19mm top spud complete with fitting and mounting accessories.Model make and
color shall be approved by the Engineer.
· 1002.2.6Bathroom and Toilet Accessories

· a.Shower head and fitting shall be movable, cone type with escutcheon arm complete with
stainless steel shower valve and control lever, all exposed surface to be chromium finish.
· b.Grab bars shall be made of tubular stainless steel pipe provided with safety grip and
mounting flange.
· c.Floor drains shall be made of stainless steel beehive type, measuring 100mm x 100mm,
and provided with detachable stainless strainer, expanded metal lath type.
· d.Toilet paper holder shall be vitreous china wall mounted. Color shall reconcile with the
adjacent fixture and facing tiles.
· e.Soap holder shall be vitreous china wall mounted. Color shall reconcile with the adjacent
tile works.
· f.Faucet(s) shall be made of stainless steel for interior use.
· g.Hose-bib(s) shall be made of bronze cast finish.
· 1002.2.7Special Plumbing Fixtures
· a.Kitchen sink shall be made of stainless steel self rimming, single compartment complete with supply fittings,
strainer traps, dual control lever and other accessories.
· b.Laboratory sink shall be made of cast iron metal with white porcelain finish with single compartment, flat rim
ledge, 762mm x 533mm complete with supply fittings, strainer, trap and other accessories.
· c.Scrub-up sink shall be made of cast iron metal with white porcelain finish measuring 610mm x 610mm complete
with supply fittings, strainer, trap and wall mounting accessories.
· d.X-ray developing tank shall be made of cast iron white porcelain finish with three (3) compartment x-ray
processing tank, drain plug, open standing drain, 19mm IPS inlet spud complete with stand and mounting
accessories.
· e.Squat bowl(s) shall be vitreous china, wash down squat bowl with integral foot treads, pail flush type. Color,
make and type to be approved by the Engineer.
· f.Grease traps shall be made of cast bronze with detachable cover and mounting accessories.
· 1002.2.8 Roof Drains, Downspout, Overflow Pipes and Steel Grating
The Contractor shall provide, fit and/or install necessary drains with strainers, where shown on the Plans. Each drain
with strainer shall fit the size of the corresponding downspout (or roof leader) over which it is to be installed and in
conformity with the following schedule:
· a.Scrupper drains (for balconies, parapet) shall be made of bronze base with flashing.
Flange threaded outlet and convex with integral flashing clamp bolted to flange.
· b."Josam" type drains shall be made of bronze base semi-dome with large free area,
flashing clamp and integral gravel stopper. To be used at roof decks, canopies, gutters, and
elsewhere indicated on the Plans.
· c.Downspouts when encased in concrete, unless otherwise shown on the Plans shall be
polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Whether indicated or specified to be cast iron or galvanized iron the
same shall meet the specification requirement as herein described.
· d.Overflow pipes shall be made of galvanized iron pipe measuring at least 13mm diameter
and spaced 200mm on center.
· e.Steel grating shall be made of wrought iron metals of design on shop drawings approved
and surfaces to be coated with shop finish.
· 1002.2.9 Fire Protection System
· a. Fire hose cabinets shall be locally available consisting of 38mm diameter valve hose
rack with nipple 30mm rubber lined hose cable with standing 4268 kg/cm square, nozzle
38mm diameter brass, chromium plated.
· b. Fire standpipe system shall consist of risers and hose valves. Pipe shall be extra strong
black iron. Valves to be high grade cast bronze mounted withstanding 79.40 kg. working
pressure as indicated on the Plans.
· c. Fire extinguisher shall be portable, suitable for Class A, B, C fires, mounted inside
cabinet. Cabinet shall be full flush mounting door with aluminum trim for glass plate, frame
and box shall be made of gauge 14 galvanized iron sheet with white interior and red exterior
baked enamel finish over primer. Cabinet to be wall mounted and size to be able to
accommodate the defined components.
· d. Yard hydrant where shown on the Plans shall match the Integrated Fire Department
requirements. Outlet shall be single 63mm diameter gate valves with chain connected caps.
1002.2.10 Built-in appliances such as urinal trough, lavatory and slope sink shall be made as indicated on the Plans,
exposed surfaces to be tile wainscoating Complete with fitting accessories required as practiced in this specialty
trade.
1002.3 Construction Requirement
The Contractor before any installation work is started shall carefully examine the Plans and shall investigate actual
structural and finishing work condition affecting all his work. Where actual condition necessitates a rearrangement of
the approved pipe layout, the Contractor shall prepare Plan(s) of the proposed pipe layout for approval by the
Engineer.
1002.3.1Installation of Soil, Waste, Drain and Vent Pipes
· a.All cast iron soil and drainage pipes shall be pitch 6mm per 300mm but in no case flatter
than 3mm per 300mm.
· b.Horizontal lines shall be supported by well secured length heavy strap hangers. Vertical
lines shall be secured strongly by hooks to the building frame and a suitable brackets or
chairs shall be provided at the floor from which they start.
· c.All main vertical soil and waste stacks shall be extended full size to and above the roof
line to act as vents, except otherwise indicated on the Plans.
· d.Vent pipes in roof spaces shall be run as close as possible to underside of roof with
horizontal piping pitched down to stacks without forming traps. Vertical vent pipes may be
connected into one main vent riser above the highest vented fixtures.
· e.Where an end or circuit vent pipe from any fixtures is connected to a vent line serving
other fixtures, the connections shall be at least 1.20 m above the floor on which the fixtures
are located.
· f.Horizontal waste line receiving the discharge from two or more fixtures shall be provided
with end vents unless separate venting of fixtures is noted on the Plans.
· g.All changes in pipe sizes on soil and waste lines shall be made with reducing fittings or
recessed reducers. All changes in directions shall be made by appropriate use of 45 degree
wyes, half wyes, long sweep quarter bends or elbows may be used in soil and waste lines
where the change in direction of flow is from the horizontal to the vertical and on the
discharge from waste closets. Where it becomes necessary to use short radius fittings in
other locations the approval of the Engineer shall be obtained prior to installation of the same.
· h.All joints of cast iron pipes in bell and spigot shall be firmly packed with oakum or hemp
and caulked with pig lead at least 25 mm deep.
· i.Cleanouts at the bottom of each soilstack, wastestack, interior downspout and where else
indicated shall be the same size as the pipe up to and including 102 mm . 152 mm, for larger
pipes.
Cleanouts on floors shall be cast iron ferrule caulked into cast hub and fitted
with cast brass screw plug flush with floor. Cleanouts for threaded pipes snail
be installed at the foot of soil, waste and drain stacks and on each building
drain outside the building.
· · j.Vent pipe shall be flashed and made watertight at the roof with ferrule lead sheet.
Flashing shall be turned down into pipes.
· k.Each fixtures and place of equipment requiring connection to the drainage system except
fixtures with continuous waste shall be equipped with a trap. Each trap shall be placed as
near to the fixture as possible.Traps installed on threaded pipe shall be recessed drainage
pattern.
· l.Overhead horizontal runs of pipes shall be hung with adjustable wrought iron pipe hanger
spaced not over 3.04 m apart except hub and spigot soil pipe which shall have hanger spaced
not over 1.50 m apart and located near a hub.
1002.3.2 Water Pipes, Fittings and Connections.
All water pipings inside the building and underground, 100 mm.diameter and smaller shall be galvanized iron
threaded pipe with malleable iron fittings.
· a.The water piping shall be extended to 'all fixtures, outlets, and equipment from the gate
valves installed in the branch near the riser.
· b.The cold water system shall be installed with a fall towards a main shutoff valve and
drain. Ends of pipes and outlets shall be capped or plugged and left ready for future
connections.
· c.Mains and Branches
· 1.All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements and shall be worked into place without
springing or forcing. Care shall be taken so as not to weaken the structural portions of the
building.
· 2.All piping above the ground shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless
otherwise indicated on the Plans.
· 3.All service pipes, valves and fittings shall be kept at sufficient distance from other work to
permit finished covering not less than 12.5mm from such work or from finished covering on
the different service.
· 4.No water piping shall be buried in floors, unless specifically indicated on the Plans and
approved by the Engineer.
· 5.Changes in pipes shall be made with reducing fittings.
· d. Drain Cocks
· 1. Pipe drain indicated on the drawings shall consist of 12 mm globe valve with renewable disc and installed at low
points on the cold water piping so that all piping shall slope 100 mm in 30.5 m.
· e. Threaded Pipe Joints
· 1. All pipes shall be reamed before threading. All screw joints shall be made with graphite and oil or with an
approved graphite compound applied to make threads only. Threads shall be full cut and not more than three threads
on the pipe shall remain exposed.
· f. Expansion and Contraction of Pipes
· Accessible contraction-expansion joints shall be made whenever necessary. Horizontal runs of pipe over 15m in
length shall be anchored to the wall to the supporting structure about midway on the run to force expansion and
contraction equally toward the ends or as shown on the Plans.
g.Fire Standpipe System
· Fire standpipe system shall consist of risers and hose valve. Pipe shall be extra strong black iron. Valves to be
underwriter's approval high grade cast bronze mounted.
· h. Valves and Hose Bibs

· 1.Valves shall be provided on all supplied fixture as herein specified.
· 2.The cold water connections to the domestic hot water heater shall be provided with gate
valves and the return circulation connection shall have gate and a check valve.
· 3.All connection to domestic hot water heaters shall be equipped with unions between
valve and tanks.
· 4.Valve shall not be installed with its stem below the horizontal. All valves shall be gate
valves unless otherwise indicated on the Plans.
· 5.Valves up to and including 50 mm diameter shall be threaded ends, rough bodies and
finished trimmings, except those on chromium plated brass pipe.
· 6.Valves 63 mm in diameter and larger shall have iron bodies, brass mounted and shall
have either screws or flange ends.
· 7.Hose bibs shall be made of brass with 12.5 mm inlet threads, hexagon shoulders and 19
mm male.
1002.3.3Fixtures, Equipment and Fastenings
· a.All fixtures and equipment shall be supported and fastened in a safe and satisfactory
workmanship as practiced.
· b.All fixtures, where required to be wall mounted on concrete or concrete hollow block wall,
fasten with brass expansion bolts. Expansion bolts shall be 6 mm diameter with 20 mm
threads to 25 mm into solid concrete, fitted with loose tubing or sleeves of proper length to
acquire extreme rigidity.
· c.Inserts shall be securely anchored and properly flushed into the walls. Inserts shall be
concealed and rigid.
· d.Bolts and nuts shall be horizontal and exposed. It shall be provided with washers and
chromium plate finish.
1002.3.4Pipe Hangers, Inserts and Supports
· a.Pipe hangers shall be wrought iron or malleable iron pipe spaced not more than 3m apart
for horizontal runs or pipe, except hub and spigot soil pipe which shall have hanger spaced
not over 1.50 m apart located near the hub.
· b. Chains, straps perforated turn-buckles or other approved means of adjustment except
the' turn-buckles may be omitted for hangers on sailor waste lines or individual toilet rooms to
maintain stacks when spaced does not permit.
· c. Trapeze hangers may be used in lieu of separate hangers on pipe running parallel to and
close to each other.
· d. Inserts shall be cast steel and shall be of type to receive a machine bolt or nut after
installation. Insert may be permitted adjustmentof the bolts in one horizontal direction and
shall be installed before pouring of concrete.
· e.Wrought iron clamps or collars to support vertical runs of pipe shall be spaced not more
than 6 m apart for as indicated on the Plans.
1002.3.5Plates and Flashing
· a.Plates to cover exposed pipes passing through floor finished walls or ceiling shall be fitted
with chromium plated cast brass plates or chromium plated cast iron or steel plates on ferrous
pipes.
· b.Plates shall be large enough to cover and close the hole around the area where pipes
pass. It shall be properly installed to insure permanence.
· c.Roof areas penetrated by vent pipes shall be rendered watertight by lead sheet flashing
and counter flashing. It shall extend at least 150 mm above the pipe and 300 mm along the
roof.
1002.3.6Protection and Cleaning
· a.During installation of fixtures and accessories and until final acceptance, protect items
with strippable plastic or other approved means to maintain fixtures in perfect conditions.
· b.All exposed metal surfaces shall be polished clean and rigid of grease, dirt or other
foreign materials upon completion.
· c.Upon completion, thoroughly clean all fixtures and accessories to leave the work in
polished condition.
1002.3.7 Inspection, Warranty Test and Disinfection
All pipes, fittings, traps, fixtures, appurtenances and equipment of the plumbing and drainage system shall be
inspected and approved by the Engineer to insure compliance with all requirements of all Codes and Regulations
referred to in this Specification.
1002.3.7.1Drainage System Test
· a.The entire drainage and venting system shall have all necessary openings which can be
plugged to permit the entire system to be filled with water to the level of the highest stack vent
above the roof.
· b.The system shall hold this water for a full 30 minutes during which time there shall be no
drop greater than 102 mm.
· c.Where only a portion of the system is to be tested, the test shall be conducted in the
same manner as described for the entire system except that a vertical stack 3.00 m highest
horizontal line to be tested may be installed and filled with water to maintain sufficient
pressure or water pump may be used to supply the required pressure.
· d.If and when the Engineer decides that an additional test is needed, such as an air to
smoke test on the drainage system, the Contractor shall perform such test without any
additional cost.
1002.3.7.2Water Test on System
· a.Upon completion of the roughing-in and before connecting fixtures the entire cold water
piping system shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure 1 1/2 times the expected working
pressure in the system during operation and remained tight and leak-proofed.
· b.Where piping system is to be concealed the piping system shall be separately in manner
similar to that described for the entire system and in the presence of the Engineer or his duly
designated representative.
1002.3.7.3 Defective Work
· a. All defective materials replaced and tested will be repeated until satisfactory
performance is attained.
· b.Any material replaced for the satisfactory performance of the system made shall be at the
expense of the Contractor.
· c.Caulking of screwed joints or holes will not be permitted.
1002.3.7.3Disinfection
· a.The entire water distribution system shall be thoroughly flushed and treated with chlorine
before it is operated for public use.
· b.Disinfection materials shall be liquid chlorine or hypochlerite and shall be introduced in a
manner approved as practiced or approved by the Engineer into the water distribution system.
· c.After a contact period of not less than sixteen hours, the heavenly chlorinated water shall
be flushed from the system with potable water.
· d.Valves for the water distribution system shall be opened and closed several times during
the 16 hours chlorination treatment is done.
1002.3.8 As-Built Drawings
Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall submit two sets of prints with all as-built changes shown on the
drawings in a neat workmanship manner. Such prints shall show changes or actual installation and conditions of the
plumbing system in comparison with the original drawings.
The work done under this Item shall be quantified per length and/or number of units as provided in the Bill of
Quantities, tested and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The quantified items, installed in place shall be the basis for payment based from the unit bid price for which prices
and payments shall constitutefull compensation including labor, materials and incidentals necessary to complete this
Item.
Payment shall be made:
Pay Item
Number
1002 (a) Cast Iron Soil Pipes and Fittings pieces/length
Galvanized Iron Pipes and

1002 (b) pieces/length
Fittings
1002(c) Plumbing Fixtures set
1002 (d) Roof Drain with Strainer set
ITEM 1003 -CARPENTRY AND JOINERY WORKS

1003.1 Description
The work under this Item shall consist of furnishing all required materials, fabricated woodwork, tools, equipment and
labor and performing all operations necessary for the satisfactory completion of all carpentry and joinery works in
strict accord with applicable drawings, details and these Specifications.
1003.2.1 Lumber
Lumber of the different species herein specified for the various parts of the structure shall be well seasoned, sawn
straight, sundried or kilndried and free from defects such as loose unsound knots, pitch I~-pockets, sapwood, cracks
and other imperfections impairing its strength, durability and appearance.
1003.2.1.1Grades of Lumber and Usage
· a.Stress grade is seasoned, close-grained and high quality lumber 1~ of the specified
specie free from defects and suitable for sustaining heavy loads.
Stress grade lumber shall be used for wooden structural members, subject to
heavy loads, and for sub-floor, framing embedded or in contact with concrete
or masonry.
· · b.Select grade lumber of the specified specie is generally of high quality, of good
appearance, without imperfections, and suitable for use ff without waste due to defects and
suitable also for natural finish.
Select grade lumber shall be used for flooring; sidings, facia and it base boards, trims, mouldings, millwork, railings,
stairs, cabinet work, shelvings, doors, windows and frames of openings.
c.Common grade lumber has minimum tight medium knot not larger, than 25 mm in diameter, with minimal
imperfections, without sapwood, without decay, insect holes, and suitable for use with some waste due to minor
defects and suitable also for paint finish.
Commongrade lumber shall be used for light framework for wall partitions, ceiling joist and nailers.
1003.2.1.2 Lumber Species and Usage
Unless otherwise specified on the Plans, the following lumber species shall be used as indicated:
· a.Yacal (stress grade) for structural member such as post, girders, girts, sleepers door and
window frames set or in contact with concrete or masonry.
· b.Guijo (select grade) for door and window frames set in wooden framework, for stairs, for
roof framing supporting ceramic or cement tiles, for floor joists and other wooden structural
parts.
· c.Apitong (common grade) for roof framing supporting light roofing materials such as
galvanized iron, aluminum or asbestos sheets, for wall framing, ceiling joists, hangers and
nailers.
· d.Tanguile (select grade) for doors and windows, facia and base boards, trims, mouldings,
millwork, railings, stairs, cabinet, work, shelvings, flooring and siding.
· e.Narra (select grade) for stair railings, flooring boards, wall panels base boards, trims,
mouldings, cabinet work, millwork, doors and windows when indicated as such in the Plans.
· f.Dao (select grade) for parts of the structure as enumerated under Section 1003.2.1.2 (e),
when indicated as such on the Plans.
1003.2.1.3 Moisture Content
Rough lumber for framing and siding boards shall be air-dried or sun-dried such that its moisture content shall not
exceed 22 percent.Dressed lumber for exterior and interior finishing, for doors and windows, millwork, cabinet work
and flooring boards shall be kiln-dried and shall not have moisture content in excess of 14 percent at the time of
installation in the structure.
1003.2.1.4 Substitution in Lumber Specie
Any lumber equally good for the purpose intended may be substituted for the specified kind subject to the prior
approval of the Engineer, provided the substitution shall be of an equal or better specie acceptable to the Engineer.
In case of substitution with better specie, no additional cost therefore shall be allowed to the contractor.
1003.2.2 Plyboard
Plyboard shall be good grade and made of laminated wood strips of uniform width and thickness bounded together
with water resistant resin glue. The laminated core shall be finished both faces with select grade tanguile or red lauan
veneers not less than 2 mm thick similarly bonded to the core. The plyboard of not less than 19 mm thick shall be
free 'from defects such as split in veneer, buckling or warping.
1003.2.3 Plywood
Plywood shall conform to the requirements of the Philippine Trade Standards 631-02. Thickness of a single layer
laminae shall not be less than 2 mm. The laminae shall be superimposed in layers with grains crossing at right
angles in successive layers to produce stiffness. The face veneers shall be rotary cut from select grade timber. The
laminae and face veneers shall be bonded with water resistant resin glue, hot pressed and pressure
treated. Ordinary tanguile or red lauan plywood with good quality face veneers, 6 mm thick shall be used for double
walling and ceiling not exposed to moisture; waterproof or marine plywood shall be used for ceiling exposed to
moisture such as at toilets and eaves, and ceiling to be finished with acrytex.
1003.2.4 Lawanit
Lawanit, when required per plans, shall be 6 mm thick, tempered or oil impregnated for moisture/water resistance.
Texture of lawanit shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
1003.2.5 Materials Other Than Lumber
1003.2.5.1 Plastic Sheet
When required for counter top, plastic sheet such as Formica shall not be less than 1.50 mm thick and shall have
hard, durable and glossy surface resistant to stain, abrasion and heat. Color and design shall be as selected from the
manufacturer's standard and approved by the Engineer.
1003.2.5.2 Glue
Glue shall be from water resistant resins which, upon hardening, shall not dissolve nor lose its bond or holding power
even when soaked with water for extended period.
Glue in powder form be in sealed container and shall be without evidence of lumping or deterioration in quality.
1003.2.5.3 Fasteners
Nails, screw, belts and straps shall be provided and used where suitable for fixing carpentry and joinery works. All
fasteners shall be brand new and of adequate size to ensure rigidity of connections.
· a.Nails of a,dequate size shall be steel wire, diamond-pointed, ribbed shank and bright
finish.
· b.Screws of adequate size shall be cadnium or brass plated steel with slotted head.
· c.Lag screws of adequate size, for anchoring heavy timber framing in concrete or masonry,
shall be galvanized steel.
· d.Bolts and nuts shall be of steel having a yield point of no't less than 245 MPa. Bolts shall
have square heads and provided with standard flat steel washers and hexagonal nuts.
Threads shall conform to American coarse thread series. The threaded portion shall be long
enough such that the nut can be tightened against the bolted members without any need for
blocking. The bolt's threaded end shall be finished smooth for ease of engaging and turning of
the nut.
· e.Wrought iron straps or angles, when required in conjunction with bolts or lag screws to
provide proper anchorage, shall be of the shape and size shown on the Plans.
1003.3.1 Quality of Materials
All materials to be incorporated in the carpentry and joinery works shall be of the quality specified under Section 2.
Before incorporation in work, all materials shall have been inspected/accepted by the Engineer or his authorized
representative.
1003.3.2 Storage and Protection of Materials

Lumber and other materials shall be protected from dampness during and af1er delivery at the site. Materials shall be
delivered well in advance of actual need and in adequate quantity to preclude delay in the work. Lumber shall be
piled in orderly stack at least 150 mm above ground and at sheltered place where it will be of least obstruction to the
work.
1003.3.3 Shop Drawings

Shop drawings complete with essential dimensions and details of construction, as may be required by the Engineer
in connection with carpentry and joinery work, shall be submitted for approval before proceeding with the work.
1003.3.4 Rough Carpentry

Rough carpentry covers timber structural framing for roof, flooring, siding, partition and ceiling.
· a.Framing shall be stress grade or common grade lumber of the specie specified under
Section.
· b.Rough carpentry shall be done true to lines, levels and dimensions.It shall be squared,
aligned, plumbed and well fitted at joints.
· c.Trusses and other roof framing shall be assembled, fitted and set to exact location and
slope indicated on the Plans.
· d.Fasteners, connectors and anchors of appropriate type and number shall be provided
and fitted where necessary.
· e.Structural members shall not be cut, bored or notched for the passage of conduits or
pipes without prior approval of the Engineer. Members damaged by such cutting or boring
shall be reinforced by means of specifically formed and approved steel plates or shapes,
otherwise, damaged structural members shall be removed and replaced to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
· f.Timber framing in contact with concrete or masonry shall be treated with termite-proofing
solution and after drying coated with bituminous paint.
1003.3.5 Finished Carpentry
Finished carpentry covers works on flooring, siding and ceiling boards, stairs, cabinets, fabricated woodwork,
millwork and trims.
· a.Framing lumber shall be select grade, free from defects and where exposed in finished
work, shall be selected for color and grain.
· b.Joints of framing shall be tenoned, mortised or doweled where suitable, closely fitted and
secured with water resistant resins glue. Exterior joints shall be mitered and interior angles
coped.
· c.Panels shall be fitted allow for contraction or expansion and insure that the panels remain
in place without warping, splitting and opening of joints.
· d.Plyboard shall be as specified under Section 1003.2.3 unless otherwise indicated on the
Plans.
· e.Plywood shall be specified under Section 1003.2.4.
· f.Exposed edges of plywood or plywood for cabinets shall be provided with select grade
hardwood strips, rabbetted as necessary, glued in place and secured with finishing nails. To
prevent splitting, hardwood for trims shall be drilled before fastening with nails or screws.
· g.Fabricated woodwork shall be done preferably at the shop. It shall be done true to details
and profiles indicated on the Plans.
· Where set against concrete or masonry, woodwork shall be installed when curing is
completed.
· h. Exposed wood surfaces shall be free from disfiguring defects such as raised grains,
stains, uneven planning, sanding, tool marks and scratches.
· Exposed surfaces shall be machine or hand sanded to an even smooth surface, ready for
finish.
ITEM 1004 -HARDWARE
1004.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installing all building hardware required to: (1) ensure rigidity of
joints/connections of the different parts of the structure; and (2) equip in a satisfactory operating condition parts of the
structure such as doors, windows, cabinets, lockers, drawers and other similar operating parts as indicated on the
plans and in accordance with this specifications.
1004.2.1 Rough Hardware
All rough hardware such as nails, screws, lag screws, bolts and other related fasteners required for carpentry work
shall be first class quality and locally available.
1004.2.2 Finishing Hardware
All finishing hardware consisting of locksets, latches, bolts and other devices, door closers, knobs, handles, hinges
and other similar hardware shall be first class quality available locally and conforming with the following
specifications.
1004.2.2.1 Door Locksets
Door locks appropriate for particular functions shall be of durable construction, preferably the product of single
reputable manufacturer for consistent quality and master keying.
1004.2.2.1.1 Cylindrical lockset for swing wood door shall of sturdy construction and knob design. The cylindrical
case shall be made of steel, zinc coated & dichromate dip. The knobs, latch, strike· & pin tumbler assembly shall be
cast brass or bronze. The spring and spindle shall be steel, zinc coated. The pins and the key, shall be nickel-silver.
The latch, with a minimum throw of 16mm, shall be retracted by knob from either side except when the outside knob
is locked by key in the outside knob or by the turn push button on the inside knob.
1004.2.2.1.2 Mortise lock for swing door shall have cast bronze latch bolt with steel compression spring, cast bronze
dead bolt with hardened steel inserts, wrought bronze or brass knobs heavy gauge and cold formed steel operation
levers. The pin tumbler cylindrical assembly shall be cast bronze or brass and fitted with 5 spring pressed nickel
silver pins. Mortise lock used in conjunction with fire exit bolts shall have armored fronts.
1004.2.2.1.3 Unit of monolock for swing door shall be factory assembled in one piece, with knobs and escutcheons
attached, ready for installation.
All parts of unit lock shall be non-ferrous metal. Frame shall be one piece cast bronze or extruded brass, front shall
be flat for door 35 mm thick and bevelled for door 45 mm thick, and latch bolt shall be pivoted swing type with
minimum 26 mm throw. Cylinder shall be extruded brass with 5 spring-pressed pins and keys shall be nickel silver.
1004.2.2.1.4 Dead lock for sliding door shall be mortise or surface mounted type to suit particular application.
· 1004.2.2.1.4.1 Mortise type dead lock shall have cast bronze case, front, latch bolts, strike
and cylinder. Operation of dead bolt shall be by drop handles from either side. When locked
by key from outside, or by thumb knob from inside, drop handle will not operate the dead bolt.
1004.2.2.1.4.2 Surface type deadlock shall have cast bronze case, strike and cylinder. Interlocking vertical bolt shall
be hardened steel operated by key from outside and thumb turn from inside. Strike shall the angle type. I
· 1004.2.2.1.5 Deadlock for swinging door shall be tubular design with mechanism made of
heavy gauge cold-rolled steel, zinc coated and dischromated. Dead bolt, strike and pin
tumbler cylinder shall be bronze.Dead bolt, with at least 25 mm throw, shall be operated by
key from outside and by thumb from inside.
· 1004.2.2.1.6 Lock for door of emergency/fire exit (panic hardware) shall be cast bronze 'or
brass and heavy duty locking device coupled with ahorizontal crossbar. Latch shall be
operated by key from outside and by crossbar from inside. Locking device shall be surface or
mortise type suitable for a particular application. Inactive leaf of double doors or
emergency/fire exit shall be fitted with vertical rod actuated by crossbars, such vertical rod
providing two point locking, bottom and overhead.
1004.2.2.1.7 Lock for drawers and cabinets shall be bronze or brass with latch operated by key through a pin-tumbler
cylinder 22 mm in diameter. Back plate of the lock shall be provided with four screw holes for mounting.
1004.2.2.1.8 Hasplock, when required as indicated on the Plans shall be hinge hasp with integral padlock. The hinge
hasp shall be zinc coated wrought steel, 47.5 mm in width and 100 mm in length when closed. The integral padlock
shall be pin tumbler type with solid or laminated zinccoated wrought steel case with hardened steel shackle securely
attached to the draw bolt.
1004.2.2.2 Door Closers
· a. All door closer shall be cast bronze provided with a key valve or cap valve for making
necessary adjustment.
· b. The following table shall serve as guide in determining door closer sizes:
Door Maximum Width
Size of Closer
0.76 m Size 2
0.90 m Size 3
1.07 m Size 4
1.20 m Size 5
1.37 m Size 6
Use larger size where unusual conditions exist.

1004.2.2.3 Hinge
Hinge unless otherwise indicated on the Plans shall be brass coated wrought iron steel for interior doors and wrought
bronze for exterior doors with non-rising loose steel pins with button tips and mounting screws of the same materials.
1004.2.2.4 Sliding Door Hardware
Sliding door hardware shall be four-wheel ball bearing trolley on overhead track. Track is of rolled steel formed steel
or extruded aluminum.
Bearing is of plain steel balls or steel rollers. Wheels to be steel, brass, rubber or plastic as the case maybe.
1004.2.2.5 Miscellaneous Hardwares
1004.2.2.5.1 Flush Bolt
Flush/extension flush type bolt shall be made of stainless steel with proper length suitable to the door specified.
1004.2.2.5.2 Barrel bolts shall be of wrought steel brass coated with an attachment of at least 4-screws.
1004.2.2.5.3 Door Pull and Push Plate
Door pull and push plate shall be made of stainless steel with concealed attachments.
1004.2.2.5.4 Hook, Bumper and Silencer
Hook, bumper and silencer shall be made of extruded brass or bronze, dull chrome finish with at least 2 screw
attachments.
1004.2.2.5.5 Furniture’s and Cabinets Hardware
Furniture and cabinet hardware line piano hinge, invisible hinge, floor pivot hinge, cabinet door catches, shall be
made from extruded brass or bronze with dull chrome finish, of sizes and type suited for use.
1004.2.2.5.6 Push Plate
Push plate for metal door shall be made of stainless steel with concealed attachments.
1004.3.1 Submittals:
The Contractor shall submit all necessary information to the Engineer prior to placing of order.
· 1004.3.1.1 Manufacturers data such as catalog for every hardware item to be furnished,

showing all finishes, sizes, catalog numbers and pictures, with all abbreviations fully
explained shall be submitted as general information and reference.
· 1004.3.1.2 Hardware templates for fabricated doors and windows shall be furnished to
each fabricator to confirm that adequate provision will be done for proper installation of the
hardware.
1004.3.1.3 Operation and maintenance data shall be provided and submitted to the Owner/DPWH showing all the
hardware component part lists and maintenance instructions for each type supplied including the necessary
wrenches of tools required.
1004.3.2 Packaging and Marking I
· 1004.3.2.1 Each article shall be individually packaged in the manufacturerscommercial

carton/container' properly marked or labeled so as to be t readily identified and delivered to
the project site in the original I manufacturers container/package. .
1004.3.2.2 All hardware shall be provided with fasteners necessary for the installation packed in the same container
with the Hardware.
1004.3.3 Storage and Protection
Hardware shall be properly stored in a dry and secured place. It shall be protected from damage at all times prior to
and after installation.
1004.3.4Installation of Hardware
· a.All hardware shall be installed in a neat workmanship manner following the

manufacturers’ instruction manual to fit details as indicated on the Plans.
· b.Except as indicated or specified otherwise, fasteners furnished with the hardware shall be
used to fasten hardware in place.
· c.After installation works are completed the hardware shall be protected from paints, stains,
blemishes and other damage until the work are properly turned over and accepted.
· d.All hardware shall be properly checked and adjusted in the presence of the engineer and
all hinges, locks, catches, bolts, pulls, closers and other miscellaneous items shall operate
properly.
· e.After hardware are properly checked and adjusted keys shall be properly identified with
key tags and turned over to the Engineer.
1004.3.5 Keying
Locks shall be keyed in sets and subsets. Where locks are required by the owner to be keyed alike in one system
furnish a total of 4 keys for each set.
All hardware actually installed shall be measured and determined by number of pieces or units ready for service as
provided in the Bill of Quantities accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Items measured and determined as provided in subsection 1004.4 shall be paid for at the unit bid price which
payment constitute full compensation of materials, labor and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

1004.2.1 Rough Hardware pcs/kilo
Finishing
1004.2.2 pcs/set
Hardware
ITEM 1005 -STEEL WINDOWS

1005.1 Description
This Item shall consist of all fabricated steel windows fully equipped with fixing accessories and locking devices as
shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
All members shall be of hot-rolled, low carbon, new billet steel, heavy section with depth of at least 33mm and web
thickness of at least 3mm. Frame members shall be of equal leg design section only at points where called for or
shown on detailed drawings. Continuous angle fins, as indicated shall be furnished. Zee type section of special
design with offset permitting down turned leg of the ventilator member to seat flush when ventilator is in a fully closed
position, shall be used for frame at sills.Ventilator members shall be special angle shape. Frames of ventilator
members shall have integral weather baffles providing double flat parallel weathering contacts of not less than 6mm
width on all four sides of the ventilator. Muntins shall be 25mm by 25mm rolled-tee sections. All members to be used
shall conform to the specification requirements of ASTM A "505. The frame member shall afford not less than 16mm
continuous anchorage to surrounding masonry. Unless otherwise specified/or indicated on Plan as residential
casement, special size of section shall be used.
1005.2.1 Residential Casement
Sections shall be hot rolled new billet steel special design. Frame and ventilator members shall be specially designed
zee sections, not less than 25 mm in depth and not less than 3 mm in thickness, with weathering baffles rolled
integrally to provide continuous double contact between frame and casement ventilator members. Muntins shall be
19mm by 19 mm rolled tee-sections. Side hung hinges shall be of extension friction type welded to both frame and
ventilator with friction washers and steel acorn-nuts.
1005.2.2 Heavy Duty Side-hinged Ventilator
Frame and ventilator members shall be specially designed zee section not less than 33 mm in depth and not less
than 3 mm in thickness, with weathering baffles rolled integrally to provide continuous double contact between frame
and side-hinged ventilator members. Muntin shall be 25 mm by 25 mm rolled tee-sections. Simplex-type hinges shall
be of extension friction type with bronze friction washers and rust proofed steel acorn-nuts., hinged design shall
provide ferrous to non ferrous contacts between all movable surfaces. Hinges shall be welded to both frame and
ventilator.
1005.2.3 Projected Ventilators
All members shall be hot rolled new billet steel window. Frames and ventilator sections shall be special angle shape
and not less than 33 mm deep from front to back not less than 3 mm in thickness.Weathering projections,
overlapping, parallel contacts at both insides and outside points of closure on all four sides of the ventilator shall be 6
mm.
1005.2.4 Awning ventilators (for series of ventilators operating simultaneously)
Frame, ventilator and muntin members shall be hot rolled new billet steel section not less than 33 mm deep,
specifically designed for steel windows.
1005.3.1 Fabrication and Welds
Corners of frame and ventilator shall be mitered and electrically butt welded with exposed welds ground smooth.
Head drips shall be provided where ventilator extend to the top of the windows. Muntins shall be welded to frames.
Muntin intersections shall be welded with flush interior surfaces.
1005.3.2 Hardware (fixing accessories and locking devices)
1005.3.2.1 Residential Casement, heavy duty side-hinged ventilator
· a. Roto Type: Each ventilator shall be hung on two heavy hot rolled steel of the extension
type, welded to both frame and ventilator. Hinged design shall provide ferrous to non ferrous
to non ferrous contacts between all movable surfaces. Hardware shall control ventilator
independently of the screen and shall consist of a polished bronze locking handle and worn
drive operator. Provide however that roto hardware shall not be used on any ventilator, the
size of which exceeds 1 square meter in area. Ventilators over 150 mm in height shall have
three (3) hinges and double locking device.
· b. Simplex-Type: Hinges shall be of extension friction type with bronze friction washers and
rust proofed steel acorn-nuts. Hinged design shall provide ferrous to non ferrous contacts
between all movable surfaces. Hinges shall be welded to both frame and ventilator.
· c. Polished bronze locking handle and strike shall be furnished for ventilator 500 mm and
under in height, two point locking devices and three (3) hinges for ventilators over 500 mm in
height. Sill adjuster shall be provided for ventilator over 1000 mm square meter in area.
1005.3.2.2 Projected Ventilators
Each ventilator shall be balanced on two heavy steel arms riveted to ventilator -and frame. Rivet holes in arms shall
be bronze bushed.Uniform tension to hold ventilator in open position shall be obtained by two heavy bronze, sliding
friction shoes with adjustable compression springs enclosed in bronze housing attached to the ventilator top rail
member. The window frame member shall act as a guide for the friction shoe. Hardware shall consist of polished
bronze pole hook ring, cam handle and strike for outward projecting ventilators. Polished bronze, pole operated
spring latches, shall be substituted for locking handles on outward projecting ventilator, out of each floor, polished
bronze, cordoperated, spring latches for inward projecting vents not within reach of floor provided with double line of
best quality sash cord 5 mm to 6 mm in diameter extending to 762 mm above floor. Polished bronze, under screen
push bar working through the member to be furnished for outward projecting ventilator when so indicated on Plans or
drawings.
1005.3.2.3 Awning Ventilators
Each awning window so indicated on the Plans shall be of the awning type window in which the ventilators operate
simultaneously and controlled manually. Each projecting ventilator shall be balanced on two heavy steel supporting
arms. Arms for upper ventilators shall have tops pivots enclosed in malleable iron housing riveted to ventilator and
pivoting point shall be located outside of window to provide efficient leverage. Ventilator in each window shall be
equipped with extension arms attached to connecting steel frame and shall be concealed within frame when
ventilators are in closed position. All ventilators shall open or close simultaneously. The bottom ventilator shall be the
means of control and shall be fitted with a solid bronze, polished, cam locking handle and strike. Base of handle to
dowel with strike to prevent side motion of ventilator. Where windows are screened, provide a bronze under screen
push bar working thru the frame member.
1005.3.3 Installation
All steel windows shall be set plumb and true in openings. The joints between the window frame and masonry shall
be carefully caulked. Contacts between windows or doors and adjacent steel including mullions shall be sealed with
mastic furnished and applied by the Contractor. Windows shall be designed for glazing from the outside with spring
wire glazing clips and glazing putty.
Mullions and anchors shall be manufacturer's standard, vertical mullions, anchors and bolts for attaching shall be
furnished where required. Adequate anchorage shall be provided to ensure firm installation.
1005.3.4 Shop Painting
All windows shall be given a coating of gray metallic paint applied to all surfaces as paint base for prevention of
corrosion. Prior to application of paint primer the steel sections shall be cleaned of rust, oil, grease and other foreign
matter.
Steel windows shall be measured by actual in place installed with respective design/style and type of operation in
square meters.
The actual area in square meters of steel windows satisfactorily installed and ready for service shall be the basis for
payment based on the unit bid or contract unit price.
1005 (a) Residential Casement square meters
1005(b) Heavy Duty Side-hinged Ventilator square meters
1005 (c) Projected Ventilator square meters
1005 (d) Awing ventilator square meters
ITEM 1006 -STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

1006.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installing all fabricated steel doors and frames equipped with fixing
accessories and locking devices in accordance with the Plans and/or shop drawings and as herein specified.
All door cladding plates or panels shall be formed from gauge 20 cold-rolled, prime quality steel. Frames shall be
formed from gauge 16 cold-rolled steel. The materials used shall conform to the specification requirement of ASTM-
A505.
1006.2.1 Tubular Door (Casement/Sliding)
· a. Hollow steel doors shall be custom built of size and details as indicated on the Plans
and/or shop drawings. Cladding of doors shall be flush or louver type. Doors shall be 44 mm
thick, side hinged or overhead· hung, as called for on the Plans.
· b. Flush doors shall be constructed from two outer steel sheets not lighter than gauge 20,
with edges welded and finished flush. The outer face sheets shall be reinforced with gauge 24
vertical channels or interlocking zee members. Sound insulation fillers of cork fiberboard,
mineral wool board or asbestos shall be placed full height in spaces between reinforcing
channels. Doors shall have smooth, flush surfaces without any visible joints or seams on
exposed faces or stile edges except around glazed or louvered pane inserts. Top and bottom
frame of doors shall have continuous reinforcing channels welded to face sheets.The channel
for exterior doors shall be inverted type, not lighter than gauge 16, constructed to form a
weather seal. Glazed opening shall be provided where indicated and molding around glazed
openings shall not be lighter than gauge 20 metal.
1006.2.2 Grille doors shall be of flat, square or round bars (wrought iron) as indicated on the Plans framed on
galvanized black iron pipe or flat wrought iron bars, of the design shown on the Plans.
· 1006.2.3 Tubular steel frames shall be machine pressed true to details, to size and shape
as shown on the Plans and shall have full welded unit or knockdown field assembled type
construction at corners and other joints.
1006.2.4 Steel Louvers
Louvers shall be machine pressed conforming to the size and design indicated on the Plans with removable louver
pane formed to fit the metal sub frame of openings. The steel sheets shall meet the requirement of ASTM 505, rivets
of ASTM B 316, screws, bolts, nuts and washers of ASTM B 211.
1006.2.5 Anchors and Fasteners
Anchors shall be steel, zinc coated or coated or painted with rust inhibitive paint, of sizes, shapes and design per
manufacturer's standards.
Floor anchors shall not be lighter than gauge 18, with exception of jamb anchors for installing door frames in metal
latch and plaster assemblies which shall be minimum of gauge 16 and shall not extend no more than 20 mm out of
the back of the jamb.
1006.3.1 Fabrication
Corner joints of frames shall be mitered and welded conforming to manufacturer's standard manual for metal doors.
All contact edges be closed tight. Welds on exposed surface shall be ground smooth and shall be neat in
appearance.
Joints for knock-down type frame corners shall be designed for simple field assembly of header to jamb members by
concealed tenon, splice plates, or other type concealed in interlocking joint that will produce square and rigid corners.
Joints shall be securely locked in place during erection and the alignment of adjoining members shall be maintained.
All bolted connections shall be provided with lock units.
1006.3.2 Shop Finish
a. Hot or Cold Phosphate Surface Treatment
All steel doors, frames and louvers shall be cleaned thoroughly, phosphate-treated to assure maximum paint
adherence and prime finish, in accordance with the following operations:
· 1. After fabrication, grease and dirt shall be removed by a hot alkali solution and rinsed with
hot water.
· 2. After cleaning, all parts shall be immersed in hot or cold phosphate solution and rinsed
with a diluted solution or chronic acid.
· 3. After drying under controlled temperature, one coat of shop primer shall be applied by
dipping type especially developed for materials treated with phosphates.
The cleaning, phosphate, dipping or spraying of shop primer and even drying shall be done on a continuous
operation in the factory.
Steel doors, frames and louvers shall be set plumb and true in 'The joint between frame and masonry shall be
carefully contacts between door/frame and adjacent steel shall be sealed with mastic.
1006.3.4 Wall Anchors
A minimum of three anchors shall be provided for each jamb. Anchors shall be located opposite the top and bottom
hinges and midway between top and bottom anchors.
Anchors for fastening frames to masonry shall be adjustable, and perforated and shall extend not less than 200 mm
into masonry.
Anchors for fastening frames to metal or wood stud partitions shall be welded to metal or nailed to wood studs
respectively.
Anchors for fastening frames to previously placed concrete or masonry shall be secured to existing construction with
expansion bolts. Frames shall be fastened securely with anchors.
Anchors for fastening frames to partitions of plaster on metal lathe shall be secured firmly to back of frames that shall
receive the latch. Adjustable strut anchors shall be provided on each side of frame for fastening to the structural
members of the partition and of the ceiling framing above. The size and type of strut anchors shall be as
recommended by the metal door manufacturer.
1006.3.5 Floor Anchors
Floor anchors shall be provided at the bottom of each jamb member, anchorsshall be fixed/adjustable and drilled for
10mm diameter anchor bolts.
Where floor fill occurs, the bottom of frames shall terminate at the indicatedfinished floor levels and shall be
supported by adjustable extensionclips resting on and anchored to the structural slab.
1006.3.6 Hardware
Sidebronze butts for side hung doors, overhead pocket hardware for trackand roller types and locksets shall be
suitable for the service required and subject to the approval of the Engineer and as provided in Item 1004, Hardware.
Steeldoors, frames, louvers, accessories and hardware shall be measured in square meters/per set as shown on the
Plans. A set shall consist of metal door, jambs, anchors and hardware except locksets.
The area in m2 for every hollow steel door, flush door, grille door and steel louver installed ready for service shall be
the basis of payment based on the unit bid or contract unit price
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item
Number
1006 (a) Hollow Steel Door m2/set
1006 (b) Flush Door m2/set
1006 (c) Grille Door m2/set
1006 (d) Steel Louver Door m2/set
ITEM 1007 -ALUMINUM GLASS DOORS

1007.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all aluminum glass door materials, labor, tools and equipment required in
undertaking the proper installation as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
· 1007.2.1 Frame and panel members shall be fabricated from extruded aluminum sections
true to details with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles and free from defects impairing
strength or durability. Extruded aluminum sections shall conform to the specification
requirements as defined in ASTM B 211.
· 1007.2.2 Screws, nuts, washers, bolts, rivets and other miscellaneous fastening devices
shall be made of non-corrosive materials such as aluminum, stainless steel, etc.
· 1007.2.3 Hardware for fixing and locking devices shall be closely matched to the extruded
aluminum section and adaptable to the type and method of opening.
· 1007.2.4 Vinyl weather strip shall be first class quality flexible vinyl forming an effective seal
and without adverse deformation when installed.
· 1007.2.5 Pile weather strip shall be silicon treated and free from residual wetting agents
and made of soft fine hair as on wool, fur, etc.
· 1007.2.6 Glazing shall conform to the requirement specified in Item 1012 -Glass and
Glazing.
For all assembly and fabrication works the cut ends shall be true and accurately jointed, free of burrs and rough
edges. Cut-out recesses, mortising, grinding operation for hardware shall be accurately made and properly reinforced
when necessary.
1007.3.1 Installation Procedure
· 1007.3.1.1 Main frame shall consist of head sill and jamb stiles specifically designed and
machined to interfit and are joined at corners with self threading screws.
· 1007.3.1.2 Frame sill shall be stepped and sloped with offset weep holes for efficient
drainage to the exterior.
· 1007.3.1.3 Door panel shall be accurately joined at corners assembled and fixed rigidly to
ensure weather tightness.
· 1007.3.1.4 Aluminum glass door and main frame shall be installed in a prepared opening to
be set plumb, square. Level and true to details.
· 1007.3.1.5 All joints between metal surface and masonry shall be fully caulked to ensure
weather tightness.
1007.3.1.6 Sliding type door panel shall be equipped with concealed roller overhead tracks with bottom guide.
· 1007.3.1.7 Double action type door panel shall be ~quipped with heavy duty hinges that will
control the door leaf in a close or open position.
· 1007.3.1.8 Weather-strip shall be furnished on edges at the meeting stiles of doors.
1007.3.1.9 Where aluminum is to be in contact with steel concrete cinder, block, tile, plaster or other similar masonry
construction the aluminum surface shall be back pain-ted before erection with a bituminous paint.
1007.3.2 Shop Finish E
Exposed aluminum surfaces shall be electro type hard coats.
1007.3.3 Protection
· a. All aluminum parts shall be protected adequately to ensure against damaged during
transit and construction operations.
· b. Aluminum parts in contact with steel members shall be properly insulated by a coat of
zinc chromate primer applied to the steel or by application of bituminous paint.
1007.3.4 Cleaning
· a. The Contractor does not only protect all entrance units during construction but also
responsible for removal of protective materials and cleaning aluminum surfaces.
· b. Aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned with plain water with kerosene or gasoline and
then wipe surfaces using clean cotton fabric. No abrasive cleaning agents shall be permitted.
Aluminum glass door, fully equipped with fixing accessories and locking devices shall be measured in square meters
base on actual in place installed as shown on the Plans accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The area in square meters of aluminum glass doors installed including main frame and ready for service as provided
in Item 1007.4 shall be the basis of payment based on the unit bid or contract unit price.
Pay Item
Number
Aluminum glass door sliding type, designated as D -on the 2

1007
schedule m
ITEM 1008 -ALUMINUM GLASS WINDOWS

1008.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all aluminum glass window materials, labor, tools and equipment required in
undertaking the proper installation as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
1008.2.1 Frame and panel members shall be fabricated from extruded aluminum section true to details with clean,
straight, sharply defined profiles and free from defects impairing strength or durability. Extruded aluminum section
shall conform to the specification requirements defined in ASTM B 211.
1008.2.2 Screws, nuts, washers, bolts, rrivets and other miscellaneous fastening devices shall be made of non-
corrosive materials such as aluminum, stainless steel, etc.
1008.2.3 Hardware for fixing and locking device shall be closely matched to the extruded aluminum section and
adaptable to the type and method of opening.
· 1008.2.4 Weather-strip shall be first class quality flexible vinyl forming an effective seal and
without adverse deformation when installed.
· 1008.2.5 Glazing shall conform to the requirements specified in Item 1012.
· 1008.2.6 Pile weatherstrip shall be silicon treated and free from residual wetting agents
made of soft fine hair as on wool, fur, etc.
For all assembly and fabrication works the cut end shall be: true and accurate, free of burrs and rough edges. Cut-
outs recesses, mortising and grinding operation for hardware shall be accurately made and properly reinforced.
1008.3.1.1 Main frame shall consist of head, sill and jamb.
1008.3.1.2 Window sash
1008.3.1.3 Window panel shall be jointed at corners with miter and fixed rigidly to ensure weather tightness.
· 1008.3.1.4 Sliding windows shall be provided with nylon sheave. Sliding panels shall be
suspended with concealed roller overhead tracks with bottom guide pitch outward and slotted
for complete drainage. The sliding panels shall be provided with interior handles. The locking
device shall be a spring loaded extruded latch that automatically engage~ special frame hips.
1008.3.1.5 Casement window type shall be provided with two hinges fabricated from extruded aluminum alloy. They
shall open on stay arms having adjustable sliding friction shoes to control window panel operations. Locking device
shall be one arm action handle for manual operations complete with strike plate.
1008.3.1.6 All joints between metal surface and masonry shall be fully caulked.
1008.3.1.7 Aluminum parts in contact with steel members shall be properly insulated by a coat of zinc chromate,
primer/bituminous paint applied to the steel surface.
· 1008.3.1.8 Weatherstrip shall be furnished on edges at the meeting stiles.

1008.3.2 Shop Finish
Exposed aluminum surfaces shall be electrotype hard coats such as anodize, satin, etc.
1008.3.3 Protection
All aluminum parts shall be protected adequately to ensure against damage during transit and construction phase.
1008.3.4 Cleaning
1008.3.4.1 The contractor does not only protect all entrance units during the construction phase but shall also be
responsible for removal of protective materials and cleaning the aluminum surface including glazing before work is
accepted by the Engineer.
1008.3.4.2 Aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned with kerosene or gasoline diluted with water and then wipes
surface using clean cloth rugs.
1008.3.4.3 No abrasive cleaning materials shall be permitted in cleaning surface.
Aluminum glass window fully equipped with fixing accessories and locking devices shall be measured in square
meters actually installed in place and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The area of aluminum glass windows in square meters ready for service as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be
the basis of payment based on the unit bid or contract unit price which price and payment constitute all materials,
labor including incidentals.
2
1008(1) Aluminum Sliding Windows
m
2
1008(2) Aluminum Casement Windows
m
ITEM 1009 -JALOUSIE WINDOWS

1009.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all jalousie window materials, labor, tools and equipment required as shown on
the Plans and undertaking the proper installation in accordance with this Specification.
· 1009.2.1 Jalousie metal frame shall be made of extruded aluminum section true to details
conforming to the specifications requirements defined in ASTM B 211. .
· 1009.2.2 Glass slats shall be 5.6 mm thick clear view of 100 mm wide smooth edge glass.
· 1009.2.3 Wood slats shall be fabricated from kiln-dried tanguile with provision of
interlocking grooves to prevent penetration of rain water.
· 1009.2.4 Insert screens shall be aluminum cloth and installed as insert overlap type.
· 1009.2.5 Wrought iron grilles shall be manufactured from 12 mm square bars or round bars
conforming to the shop drawing submitted and approved by the Engineer.
· 1009.2.6 Wood jalousie window assembly shall be fabricated of kiln dried wood boards
consisting of the following members:
· a. Vertical operating mechanism shall be of paired zigzag cut member one fixed to the
wood jambs.
· b. Slats/blades are made with interlocking grooves. It shall be of kiln-dried tanguile 15.8
mm thick by 100 mm wide.
· c. Lever handles are made of wrought iron flat bars that should lock the unit in closed
position.
· 1009.2.7 Wood jambs shall be fabricated from well seasoned wood specie conforming to Item 1003, Carpentry
and Joinery requirements.
· 1009.3.1 All window frames shall be in place and rigidly anchored in a prepared opening
before any installation work is commenced.
· 1009.3.2 Window openings shall fit commercial height of the vertical operating
mechanism/jalousie metal frames to avoid cutting of members.
· 1009.3.3 Installation Procedures
1009.3.3.1 Glass Jalousie Windows
· a. Jalousie metal frames shall be temporarily fixed at bottom and top ends using wood
screw.
· b.Place glass slats into the slat clips starting below until the whole units are entirely glazed.
· c. Operate units and make adjustment where required taking, into consideration that all
units are properly aligned and satisfactory operational.
· d. Close the slats clips in a manner that the glass slats are securely fixed them permanently
fix all units with wood screws.
1009.3.3.2 Wood Jalousie Windows
· a. Fit each unit into the prepared window opening and temporarily fix with nails at bottom
and top ends of vertical operating mechanism.
· b. Operate units and make adjustments where required.
· c. Fix all units permanently and properly align each unit.
All works performed under this Item shall be measured in square meters or number of units installed complete with
glass, wood slats and ready for service.
The completed work, measured in accordance with Sub-section 1009.4 and accepted by the Engineer, shall be the
basis for payments which price and payment constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials fabricated wood
products, tools, equipment, labor and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
2
1009(1) Glass Jalousie Windows
m
2
1009(2) Wood Jalousie Windows
m
ITEM 1010 -WOODEN DOORS AND WINDOWS

1010.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, hardware, plant, tools, labor and services necessary for complete
fabrication and installation of wooden doors and windows of the type and size as shown I on the Plans and in
accordance with the following specifications and I applicable specifications under Item 1003 on Carpentry and
Joinery I Works.
1010.2.1 Lumber
Lumber of doors, windows and jambs, and panels when required, shall be kiln-dried with moisture content of not
more than 14% and shall be of the specie indicated on the Plans and/or specified under Item 1003 on Carpentry and
Joinery Works.
1010.2.2 Plywood.
Plywood for veneer of solid core and hollow core flush doors shall be 3-ply, rotary cut, 6mm thick ordinary plywood,
Class B grade. Marine or waterproof plywood, rotary cut, 3-ply, 6 mm thick shall be used for flush doors at toilets and
bathrooms or at places where these are exposed to moisture.
1010.2.3 Adhesive
Adhesive shall be water resistant resins and shall be non-staining.
1010.2.4 Glass
Glass for window panes shall be 3 mm thick, smoked or Industry type unless otherwise shown on the Plans or
indicated in the Schedule of Doors and Windows.
1010.2.5 Capiz Shells
Capiz shells, when required for window sashes, shall be of selected quality, free from dirt or blemishes and shall be
large enough to obtain flat square piece.
1010.2.6 Hardware
Hardware shall be as specified under Item 1004 on Building Hardware.
1010.3.1 Fabrication
Wooden doors and windows, including frames, shall be fabricated in accordance with the designs' and sizes shown
on the Plans. The fabricated products shall be finished square, smoothly sanded and free from damage or war page.
a. Flush Type Hollow Core Doors
Flush type hollow core doors shall be adequately framed with stiles and top and bottom rails having a minimum
thickness of 44 mm and width of 75 mm. Two intermediate rails at least 44 mm wide shall be provided for stiffness.
The stiles and the top and bottom rails shall be rebutted at least 10 mm wide to receive the 6 mm thick plywood
veneer. A lock block shall be' provided at each stile, long enough to connect to the two intermediate rails and at least
75 mm wide for mounting the lockset.
The plywood veneer shall be glued and nailed to the framing with 25 mm long finishing nails space at not more than
150 mm on centers.
b. Flush Type Solid Core Doors
Flush type solid core doors shall be fabricated in the same manner as the hollow core type except that spaces
between stiles and r3i1s shall be filled and fitted with wood blocks of the same specie and of uniform thickness
thinner by about the thickness of the plywood veneers. The filler blocks shall be secured to either stiles or rails by
nails. Stiles and rails of flush type doors shall be joined by means of blind mortise and tenon joint, tightly fitted, glued
and locked with bamboo pin 5 mm round.
c. Panel doors
Stiles and rails of panel doors shall have a minimum thickness of 44 mm and width of 140 mm.
Rails minimum thickness of 44 mm and width of 140 mm. Rails shall be framed to stiles by mortise and tenon joints.
Rabbets or grooves of stiles by mortise and tenon joints. Rabbets or grooves of stiles and rails to receive panels shall
be 6.5 mm wide and 20 mm deep. Integral moldings formed on both faces of stiles and rails framing the panels shall
be true to shape and well defined. Intersections of moldings shall be mitered and closely fitted.
Panels of the same specie and having a minimum thickness of 20 mm shall be beveled around its edges up to a
minimum width of 50 mm, both faces. The beveled edges shall closely fit into the grooves of stiles ',"j and rails, but
free to move to prevent splitting when shrinkage occurs.
d. Window Sashes with Glass Panes or Wood Panels
Window sashes shall be fabricated in conformity with the design, .1 size and type of installation shown on the Plans.
Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, stiles and rails shall be Tanguile with minimum I thickness of 30 mm and width
of 70 mm. Jointing of stiles and rails shall I be mortise and tenon secured with glue and bamboo pin. Stiles and rails
shall rebut at the exterior face for mounting glass panes or wood I panels. Integral moldings formed as frames for
panes or panels shall be true to shape, sharply defined and mitered at joints. Separate moldings, Of the same design
shall be provided for fixing glass panes and wood panel from the outside.
e. Window Sashes with Capiz Shells
Stiles and rails shall be of the same sizes specified under Item 1010.3.1 (d) and assembled with mortise and tenon
joint. Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, lattices for framing capiz shall be tanguile, 8 mm thick and 15 mm
wide, spaced at not more than 60 mm on centers both ways. Grooves 2 mm wide and 5 mm shall be made at sides
of lattices to receive the preformed capiz shells.
The lattices shall be assembled with half lap joints at their intersections and the assembled lattices containing the
capiz shells shall be framed into the stiles and rails.
Selected capiz shells shall be washed to remove dirt and blemishes and drier under the sun for bleaching effect.
Capiz shells shall be cut square to required sizes with sharp bench cutter to produce non-serrated and non-peeling
edges.
f. Sliding Type Window Sashes
Stiles of sliding type window sashes shall be framed to the top and bottom rails with mortise and tenon joints. Tenons
shall be formed on the stiles. Joints shall be tightly fitted, glued and locked with bamboo pins. Top and bottom rails
shall be 10 mm wider than the stiles. Top rails shall be rabbeted to form tongue flush with the outer face, with width of
8 mm and height of 10 mm. The stiles and rails shall be rabbeted as specified under Item 1010.3.1 (d) to receive
glass panes or wood panels.
g. Awning Type Window Sashes
Tenons of rails shall be fitted into the mortises formed on the stiles and the joints glued and locked. The stiles and
rails shall be rabbeted as specified under Item 1010.3.1 (d) for mounting of glass panes. Series of sashes to be
installed vertically shall have their meeting rails rabbeted for half lapping when in closed position.
h. Casement Type Window Sashes
Rails of casement type window sashes shall be fitted to stiles with mortise and tenon joint. Tenons shall be formed in
the rails. Meeting rails shall be rabbeted to provide for half lapping when in closed position. The stiles and rails shall
be rabbeted as specified under Item 1010.3.1 (d) for mounting of glass panes or wood panels.
i. Door and Window Frames
Framing of the specie(s) specified under Item 1003 shall be fabricated in conformity with the profile and sizes shown
on the Plans. Frames shall be assembled with tightly fitted tongue and groove joint mitered at both sides, and nailed.
The assembled frames shall be finished square and flat on the same plane. Assembled frames shall be braced
temporarily to prevent their distortion during delivery to the site and installation.
1010.3.2Installation
a.Frames shall be set plumb and square in concrete/masonry work or framework of walls or partitions. Frames set in
concrete or masonry shall be painted with hot asphalt at its contact surface and provided with two rows of common
wire nails 100 mm long for anchorage. The nails shall be staggered and spaced at 300 mm on center along each
row. Frame set in concrete shall be installed in place prior to concrete work.
Frames set in masonry work may be installed alter laying of hollow concrete blocks, bricks or adobe. Space between
frames and masonry shall be fully filled with cement mortar proportioned 1:3.
· b.Hinged Doors
Hinged doors, whether panel or flush type with standard height of 2100 mm and width of not more than 900 mm shall
be hung with four loose-pin butt hinges, 100 mm x 100 mm. Swing out exterior doors shall be hung with four fast-pin
butt hinges. Two hinges shall be fitted 150 mm from top and bottom edge of door. The other two hinges shall be fitted
at third points between top and bottom hinges. Care should be taken to ensure that the hinges are fitted such that
their pins are aligned for ease of pin insertion and smoothness of operation. For added smoothness pins should be
lightly greased. Hammering of hinges to attain proper, alignment shall not be allowed.
For wider and heavier doors such as narra panel doors, an additional hinge shall be fitted 100 mm below the top
hinge to counteract the door tilting action.
Mounting screws shall be screwed in place in their entire length, not forced into place by hammering. Hammering of
screw into place shall not be permitted.
c. Sliding Doors
Overhead tracks, standard, locally manufactured as per Plans shall be installed level and mounting bracket secured
in place with lag screws supplied with the set. Bracket shall be spaced 1000 mm 'on centers. Hangers, two each per
door leaf, shall be per fitted and bolted to the dour rail. For panel doors the hangers shall be centered on the door
stiles. For flush doors, the hangers shall be centered 100 mm from the edges of the door. If there is no adequate
space for installing the door with its attached rollers, through either end of the track the per fitted hangers shall be
disassembled for connection to the rollers.
After installation on the track, set the door plumb and in alignment by means of the adjustment mechanism integrated
with the roller assembly.
d.Lock Installation
Locks of doors shall be fitted at the same height, centered 1000 mm above the finished floor level. Locks shall be
installed in conformity with the templates and instructions supplied with locksets. Holes for mounting locks shall be
properly formed to provide snug fit and rigid attachment of the locks to the doors. Strike plates shall be fitted on the
door frame in true alignment with the lock latch.
e.Sliding Type Window Sashes
Sashes shall be trimmed to fit height of opening. A clearance of 2 mm shall be provided between the toungue’s base
at the top rail and the bottom of the window head. Paraffin wax shall be applied to contacts of sliding sufaces. The
bottom rails shall be fitted with standard brass guided spaced 75 mm from both ends of the rail, mounted flush with
the inner face and secured with three brass screws each guide.
f.Casement Type Window Sashes
Sashes shall be trimmed to fit size of opening, with provision for half lapping of meeting stiles. Right side sash shall
lap onto the left side sash. Sashes shall be fitted with two brass-plated narrow hinges, 50 mm x 75 mm, spaced 150
mm from top and bottom of stiles. In lieu of hinges, sashes maybe hung with cadmium-plated steel casement
adjusters 200 mm long, subject to prior approval of the Engineer. The top and bottom rails of casement type window
sashes shall be milled to provide for the installation of adjusters.
g.Awning type Window Sashes
Installation of awning type sashes shall be by means of casement adjusters specified under Item 1010.3.2 (f).
1010.4 Measurement and Payment
Frames of doors and windows shall be measured and paid for on the basis of number of sets completely installed
and accepted by the Engineer.
Doors and windows shall be measured and for based on the number of square meters involved in the completed and
accepted installation. Payment per square meter shall include cost of required hardware and all incidental expenses,
but exclusive of locks for doors. Locks shall be paid for per set completely installed.
The different pay items under Wooden Doors and Windows shall be designated the following number, description
and unit of measure:
Pay Item Description Unit of
Number Measurement
1010 (a) Frames (Jambs, sills, head Transoms and mullions set
1010 (b) Doors (Flush or panel) m2
1010 (c) Window Sashes m2
1010 (d) Door Locks set
ITEM 1011 – ROLLING UP DOORS

1011.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing all plant, labor, tools, equipment and rolling up door required as shown on the
Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
Rolling up door shall be surfaced mounted type designed for exterior service opening as indicated on the Plans.
Component parts shall conform with the following material specifications:
· 1. Curtain – shall be manufactured of interlocking curved or flat slats, rolled from galvanized
and bonderized steel, aluminum or stainless steel as the case maybe. Slats shall be of size
and thickness to withstand 0.957 KPa windload.
Curtain is composed of:
· · a) Interlocking slats shall roll up on a drum supported at head of opening on brackets and
shall be balanced by helical springs.
· b) Endlocks – shall be malleable iron riveted to each ends of slats. These are called
continuous when they reinforce both ends of all slats, alternate when every other slat.
· c) Bottom bar – shall be manufactured from two equal sized angles, minimum 3 mm thick
bolted back to back with appropriate half slat at lowest edge of curtain. In addition, exterior
door shall have compressible and replaceable rubber or vinyl weather seal attached to bottom
rail.
· 2. Counter balance barrel assembly – shall include spring barrel which serves as load carrying beam encases
counter balance mechanism and provide axis around curtain coils. Asit arises barrelrings are involute shapes of
malleable iron to assure proper counter balance for all points of travel. Oil tempered torsion type counter balance
springs are wound from heat treated steel, to provide accuracy in balancing door.
· 3. Hood – shall be manufactured from 0.60 mm thick (minimum) galvanized sheet metal, flanged at top for
attachment to header and flanged at bottom to provide longitudinal stiffness. Hood shall enclose curtain coil and
counter balance mechanism.
· 4. Brackets – shall be made of precisely formed plate with permanently sealed ball bearings, designed to enclose
end of the curtain coil and provide support for counter balance pipe at each end.
· 5. Guides – shall be fabricated from structural steel angles or precision roll formed channels and angles.
Especially adaptable for doors exposed to heavy wind pressure. Designed with groove depths varying from 50 mm to
150 mm depending upon the width of the door, and set cut from the face of the wall to facilitate the travel of the
curtain.
Doors shall be mechanically operated and with provision for manual operation by means of hand chain. Accessories
needed for the satisfactory performance of the door shall be built-in with the unit.
1011.3.1 Erection/Installation
· a) Set and install structural steel angels properly aligned, plumb, level, square true to profile
section and rigidly anchored with adjacent concrete surface walls.
· b) Allow all adjacent items of work to be completed before any installation work is started
except the installation of structural steel angels.
· c) Assemble rolling up doors in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction manual or
as indicated in the shop drawing approved.
· d) All anchors and insets for guide, brackets and other accessories shall be located
accurately.
1011.3.2 Locking Devices
Curtain shall be located at each end of bottom bar by concealed slide bolts which shall engage a lock wedge in each
guide. A plunger type cylinder lock is provide as standard equipment.
1011.3.3 Warranty
Upon completion and before final acceptance of the equipment; the Contractor shall furnish the DPWH/Owner a
written guaranty stating that the rolling up door equipment and accessories are free from defects. The guaranty shall
be for the period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the work. Any part of the equipment that
becomes defective during the term of the guaranty shall be replaced and made good by the Contractor at his own
expense a manner satisfactory to the DPWH/Owner.
1011.3.4 Method of Measurement
The work executed under this item shall bemeasured by actual units of rolling up door installed at jobsite complete
and ready for service. The computed unit shall bear type o materials and area of opening covered and shall be
accepted by the Engineer.
1011.3.5 Basis of Payment
The accepted work qualified and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the unit Bid price which
constitutes full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment and other incidentals necessary to
complete this Item.
Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement
Number Measurement
Rolling up door (indicate Metal door size and type of Curtain

1011 (a) unit/set
slats)
ITEM 1012 – GLASS AND GLAZING

1012.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all glass and glazing materials, labor, tools, plant and requirement required in
undertaking the proper installation as shown on the Plans and accordance with this Specification.
All glass and glazing materials shall be delivered at jobsite with labels affixed indicating quality, make type and
thickness. Each glass in glazed position shall resist a design pressure of 244 kilogram per square meter.
1012.2.1 Plate Glass
Plate glass shall be manufactured from float glass that is mechanically rounded and polished and sealed with a
coating of silver and a uniform film of electrolytic copper planting, then applied with protective coating of paint to seal
out moisture from the silver. Use where good vision is required.
1012.2.2 Float Glass
This basic type of glass shall be manufactured by “floating” continuous ribbon of molten glass into a bath of molten tin
where it is reheated to obtain a flat fire-polished finish and annealed slowly to produce a transparent float glass thus
eliminating grinding and polishing. Used commonly in windows, sliding doors and windows walls. Variations of this
basic type are as follows:
Grade AA-Intended or use where superior quality is required. Grade A-Intended for selected glazing. Grade B-Intended for general glazing.
Greenhouse quality-Intended for Greenhouse glazing where quality is not important.

1012.2.3 Glazing materials for glass installation maybe:
· a) Bulk compound such as:

· a-1) Mastics that are elastic compounds and non-skinning compound.
· a-2) Putties – shall be wood sash putty, or metal sash quality.
· a-3) Sealant shall be chemically compatible with setting blocks, edge blocks and sealing
tapes.
· b) Performed sealants such as:
· b-1) Synthetic polymer shall be base sealants that is resilient or non-resilient type.
· b-2) Performed gaskets shall be compression or structural type.
· c) Setting and Edge Blocks shall be made o lead or neoprene, chemical compatible with sealants.
· d) Accessories like glazing clip, shims spacer strips, etc. shall be made from non-corroding metal accessories.
1012.2.4. Schedule of Glass and Mirrors
1012.2.4.1 Use 5.6 mm (7/32”) thick sheet glass of locally manufactured clear quality (unless otherwise indicated on
the Plans as frosted) for the following:
· a) Aluminum windows and doors, notwithstanding plate glass indicated elsewhere.

· b) Jalousie window glass slats.
· c) Fixed glass louvers.
· d) Glass panels for partitions and counter door panels, if any.
· e) Sliding glass doors for cabinets.
1012.2.4.2 All glass panels for cabinets, except sliding doors shall be clear glass of locally manufactured float glass
quality, 4.7 mm (3/16”) thick.
They shall be clear, except where indicated on the Plans as frosted, diffused or opaque. Same shall be used for
wooden sashes.
1012.2.4.3 Unless otherwise noted, clear glasses that are locally manufactured shall be used or steel windows.
· a) Use 3.1 mm (1/8”) thick for areas exceeding .069 square meters.
· b) Use 4.7 mm (3/16”) thick for areas exceeding .609 square meters.
· 1012.2.4.4 All comfort rooms whether shown or not, the contractor shall provide and fit
securely in place at the most convenient height above each lavatory 1 mirror, made from local
glazing quality polished plate glass 6 mm thick with beveled edge and brass chromium plated
frame 12 mm thick waterproof tan guile marine plywood backing, all in accordance with full
size details. Sizes are as follows:
· a) Over single lavatories, 600 mm x 750 mm (24” x 30”).
· b) For two lavatories, 1200 mm x 750 mm (48” x 30”).
· c) For three lavatories, 1800 mm x 750 mm (72” x 30”).
Safety precaution and procedure shall be taken in determining the sizes and providing the required clearances by
measuring the actual opening to receive the glass. Movable items shall be kept in closed and locked position until
glazing compound has thoroughly set.
· 1012.3.1.1 All glass sheets shall be bedded, back puttied, secured in place and face
puttied. Secure glass in aluminum frame with non-corrosive clips except where glazing beads
are required. Apply putty in uniformly straight lines, with accurately formed bevels and clean-
cut corners; remove excess putty from glass.
· 1012.3.1.2 Set glass in hollow metal doors and in metal frames of interior partition in felt
channel insets or added in putty to prevent any rattle; secure glass in wood doors and
wooden frames with glazing stops; secure stops on doors with screws.
· 1012.3.1.3 Glass breakage caused in executing the work or by faulty installation shall be
replaced by the Contractor without extra cost.
· 1012.3.1.4 Improperly set glass which does not fully meet requirements of its grade shall
not be accepted and shall be replaced without extra cost.
· 1012.3.1.5 The Contractor shall provide and install complete set ready for use, mirrors in all
comfort rooms and elsewhere shown on the Plans. Size and location for each mirror shall be
as indicated on the Plans.
1012.3.2 Workmanship
· 1012.3.2.1 All glass shall be accurately cut to fit opening and set with equal bearing on the
entire width of pane.
· 1012.3.2.2 Putty shall be neatly run in straight lines parallel with inside of glazing rebate;
corners shall be carefully made; all excess putty shall be removed and surface left clean.
1012.3.2.3 Apply a thin layer of putty to rebate and set glass or putty, pressing until an even bed is secured; place
spring wire or angle glazing clips and run face putty; remove excess putty shall be removed and surface left clean.
1012.3.3 Cleaning
Clean all glass on both sides after putty has been applied completely. Do not disturb edge of putty with scraper. At
completion of work leave glass and glazing works free from cracks and rattles and clean on both sides.
1012.3.4 Samples
The Contractor shall submit for approval duplicate sample (150 mm x 250 mm) of each type of glass bearing
manufacturer’s label and a can of each type of putty.
This item shall be measured by actual area of glass sheets installed respective of the quality type and thickness in
square meters. The quantified unit of measurement shall be those accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The quantities Item prescribed in sub-section 1012.4 shall be paid for the unit bid price which payment constitute full
compensation for all glass and glazing materials and other facilities, labor and incidents necessary to complete this
Item.
Pay ItemNumber Description Unit of Measurement
1012 (a) Float Glass m²
1012 (b) Ordinary window and Sheet glass m²
1012 (c) Plate Glass m²
ITEM 1013 – CORRUGATED METAL ROOFING

1013.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all plant equipment, tools, materials and labor required to properly perform and
complete the corrugated metal roofing, together with related accessories such as ridge/hip rolls, valleys, gutters and
flashing, when called for on Plans all in conformity with his Specifications.
1013.2.1 Corrugated and Plain Galvanized Iron Sheets
Corrugated galvanized iron (G.I.) sheets, including plain G.I. sheets for roofing accessories, shall be cold-rolled
meeting ASTM A 153 and with spelter coating of zinc of not less than 0.381 kg/m² (1.25 ounces/square foot),
conforming to ASTM A 525 OR pns 67:1985. Unless otherwise specified or shown on Plans roofing sheets shall be
gauge 26 (0.48 mm thick) and provided in long span sizes to minimize end laps. Sheets shall weigh not less than
3.74 kg/m² and shall be marked or stamped showing the gauge, size, amount of zinc coating, brand and name of
manufacturer. Test specimens shall stand being bent through 180° flat on itself without fracture of the base metal and
without flaking of the zinc coating.
1013.2.2 Strap Fasteners
Strap fasteners shall be gauge 26 G.I. 25 mm wide and sufficiently long to bend around up to the opposite face of
purlin, with corners chipped off at the riveting ends.
1013.2.3 Rivets, Washers and Burrs
Rivets and washers shall be galvanized mild iron. Rivets shall not be less than 5 mm in diameter and 10 mm in
length. Washers shall not be less than 1.5 mm thick and 20 mm in outside diameter. Washer’s inside diameter shall
provide snug fir to the rivet.
1013.2.4 Soldering Lead
Soldering lead shall have a composition of 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead, conforming to ASTM B 32.
Rivets and burrs for lap joints of gutters, downspouts and flashing shall be copper not less than 3.175 mm in
diameter (No. 8).
1013.2.5 Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessories
Ridge/hip rolls, valleys, flashing and counter flashings, gutters and downspouts, whenever required, shall be
fabricated from plain G.I. sheets. Ridge/hip rolls, flashings and counter flashings shall be gauge 26. Valleys, gutters
and downspouts shall be gauge 24 unless otherwise specified on Plans. Wire basket strainers shall be galvanized,
gauge 24.
Roof ventilators, whenever required shall be fabricated from gauge 26 plain G.I. sheets and constructed to the
dimensions and details shown on Plans.
1013.3.1 Preparatory Work
Preparatory Work to the installation of the corrugated G.I. roofing, purlins should have been placed and spaced
properly to fit the length of roofing sheets to be used such that the centerline of the purlins at end laps are 150 mm
from the bottom line of end laps and intermediate purlins are place equidistantly. Top of purlins should be at the
same plane.
1013.3.2 Installation of Corrugated G.I. Sheets
Installation of corrugated G.I. sheets with end laps shall start at the lower part of the roof and proceed towards the
directon of monsoon wind with side laps of two-and-a-half (2-1/2) corrugations. End laps shall be 250 mm minimum.
Each sheet shall be fastened temporarily by 1.83 mm diameter by 25 mm long galvanized flat head nails at valleys of
corrugations covered by side or end laps.
Succeeding upper rows of corrugated G.I. sheets shall be installed in the same manner until the entire roof area is
covered.
Valleys, ridge/hip rolls and flashings when required, shall be installed before fastening the roofing sheets with
galvanized straps and rivets. One strap shall be riveted at each alternate corrugation at the gutter line, the ridge line
and at end laps and the straps bent around and nailed to the purlins. Riveting at intermediate purlins between end
laps shall be done at every fourth corrugation. Rivet shall be provided with a galvanized mild iron washer below and
one lead and one galvanized iron washer above the sheet. Rivet shall be sufficiently long to permit forming a
hemispherical head. Riveting shall be done such that the lead washer shall be compressed to provide a watertight fit
around the rivet.
1013.3.3 Installation of Roofing Accessories
· a) Ridge and Hip Rolls

Ridge and hip rolls shall lap at least 250 mm over roofing sheets and,
together, shall be riveted at every second corrugation.
· · b) Valleys
Valleys shall lap at least 450 mm each way under the roofing sheets and shall be secured to the framework with
galvanized nails, such nails placed below the roofing sheets. Rivets along side of the valley shall be at every second
corrugation.
· c) Flashing
Flashing, of gauge 26 plain G.I. sheets, unless otherwise specified, shall be installed along intersections of roofs with
concrete or masonry walls in accordance with details shown on Plans. Flashing running parallel to sheet corrugation
shall lap at least two corrugations with edge turned down. Flashing across sheet corrugation or at an angle thereto,
shall lap at least 250 mm and the edge of flashing turned down at each corrugation. The vertical portion of flashing
adjoining wall shall be at least 200 mm wide and provided with counter flashing.
· d) Counter Flashing
Counter flashing sheets of gauge 24 plain GI shall be built into preformed wedge-shape groove of concrete or
masonry wall. The edge to be built into wall groove shall have a 25 mm strip bent 45 degrees and shall be sealed in
the groove with cement mortar or caulking compound.
· e) Reglets
Reglets when required per plans in connection with counter flashing shall be fabricated products approved by the
Engineer, complete with fittings. Reglets shall be located not less than 200 mm or more than 40 mm above roofing.
Reglet plugs shall be spaced not more than 300 mm on centers. Open-type reglets shall be filled with fiber board or
other suitable separator to prevent crushing of the slot during installation. The counter flashing shall be inserted into
the full depth of reglet and the reglet lightly punched-every 300'mm to crimp the reglet and the counter flashing
together.
· f) Gutters
Gutters, from gauge 24 plain G.I. sheets, shall be fabricated to the shape and dimensions indicated on the Plans.
The rear side of the gutter shall have a 12.5 mm strip bent 30 degrees and shall be not less than 12.5 mm higher
than the opposite side. Gutter joints shall be flat seam folded in the direction of flow and soldered evenly. Otherwise,
gutter joints shall be lapped at least 25 mm, fastened together with 3.175 mm diameter (No.8) copper rivets and
burrs, and sealed by soldering along both exposed edges of lap.
Gutter shall be attached to fascia board or roof nailer with galvanized nails or screws spaced at not more than 900
mm on centers and at a point slightly higher than leading edge of gutter. As additional support, gutter shall have plain
G.I. strap hangers 25 mm wide fastened to roof nailers by screw shank-type nails and riveted to the gutter':; leading
edge. Strap hangers shall be spaced at not more than 900 mm on centers. When shown on Plans that gutter is not
fixed to fascia board or purlin, gutter shall be supported by wrought iron (W.I.) hangers not less than 4.75 mm thick
and 19 mm wide spaced at not more than 900 mm on centers. W.I. hanger shall be fabricated to fit configuration of
the gutter and attached to fascia board or purlin with two (2) No.8 flat head wood screws.
Gutter shall be installed with a pitch of 1 in 100 slope to downspout.
· g) Downspouts
· 1) Downspouts
Unless specified otherwise, downspouts shall be plain G.I., thickness fabricated to the dimensions shown on the
Plans and installed at indicated locations. Downspout shall be secured to the wall with G.I. straps 25 mm wide,
spaced at more than 1000 mm and anchored with concrete nails. Inlets of downspouts shall be fitted with gauge 14
wire basket strainers.
· 2) Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Downspouts

When shown on Plans that downspouts are other than G.I. sheets,
downspouts shall be unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipes and fittings
with dimensions indicated and conforming with ASTM D 3033 and D 3034.
Joints shall be made with either solvent cement or rubber "O-rings" depending
on the design of fitting for the joints. Rubber "O-rings" shall be neoprene type,
heat and oil resistant, complying with ASTM F-477. Downspout shall be
secured to adjoining wall with plain G.I. straps 25 mm wide and spaced at not
more than 1000 mm.
· · g) Roof Ventillators
Roof ventillators, whenever shown on Plans shall be firmly secured to the roofing or roof structure by means of rivets,
Roof ventillators installed on the roof at places other than the ridge shall be provided with adequate flashing around
intersection with roofing to ensure watertight joints.
1013.3.4 Joints of G.I. Roofing Accessories
· a) Soldered Joints
Joints made by lapping coupled with riveting shall be rendered watertight by soldering. All edges of uncoated sheet
metal to be soldered shall be pretinned before soldering. Soldering shall be done slowly with well heated iron in order
to thoroughly heat the seam and sweat the solder completely through the full length of the seam. Upon completion of
soldering, acid shall be neutralized by washing thoroughly with water.
· b) Non-soldered Joints
Non-soldered joints of G.I. gutters, downspouts and flashings shall be done by flat lock seams. Two adjoining edges
of lock seam shall be bent 90°. One bent strip shall be at least 15 mm wide and the connecting piece shall have a
bent strip twice in width which shall be bent down over the upturned narrower strip and pressed together. Once
properly interlocked, the joint shall be flattened such that the edge of the wider strip be concealed.
1013.3.5 Roof Installation on Metal Purlins
Installation on metal purlins shall follow the same procedure as that on wood purlins, except that fastening shall be
done with thread-cutting, zinc-coated steel screws, No. 12 by 50 mm. having hexagonal heads and provided with
neoprene washers. Screw holes shall be drilled using 5 mm (13/64") diameter bit.
1013.3.6 Water Leak Test
The completed roofing shall be tested for water tightness at side and end laps at joints of roofing sheets with
ridge/hips rolls, valleys and flashings by means of water spray system. The water-spray system shall have nozzle
which will deliver water pressure of 2 kg/cm2 directly to the joint being tested in such manner and for a duration
directed by the Engineer. All defective works as determined by this test shall be remedied by the contractor at his
expense and the test shall be repeated until the work is found satisfactory.
Roofing sheets shall be measured and paid for on an area basis in square meters or part thereof, such roofing sheets
including all laps, fasteners and rivets as installed complete and accepted.
Ridge/hip rolls, flashings, valleys, gutters and down-spouts shall be measured in linear metre of completed and
accepter work such measurement shall include necessary straps and fixings required for complete installation.
Roof ventilators shall be measured and paid for per unit completely installed and accepted.
The different pay Items under roofing work shall be designated the following number, description and unit of
measure:
Pay Item Unit of

Description
Number Measurement
2
1013.2.1 Corrugated roofing, gauge 26
m
Fabricated metal roofing accessories: a) Ridged/hip rolls, flashings, gutters

1013.2.2 and 1m 1m
downspouts, gauge 26 b) Valleys, counter flashing gutter and downspouts, gauge 24
1013.2.3 Roof ventilators each

Payment for completely installed and accepted roofing sheets and required fabricated metal roofing accessories shall
be based on actual measurement and the corresponding contract unit price thereof. Payment based on contract unit
price shall constitute full compensation.
ITEM 1014 -PREPAINTED METAL SHEETS
1014.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all pre-painted metal sheet materials, tools and equipment, plant including labor
required in undertaking the proper installation complete as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this
Specification.
All pre-painted metal sheet and roofing accessories shall be oven baked painted true to profiles indicated on the
·Plans.
1014.2.1 Pre-Painted Roofing Sheets
Pre-painted roofing sheets shall be fabricated from cold rolled galvanized iron sheets specially tempered steel for
extra strength and durability. It shall conform to the material requirements defined in PNS 67: 1985. Profile section in
identifying the architectural moulded rib to,be used are as follows: Regular corrugated, Quad-rib, Tri-wave, Rib-wide,
twin-rib, etc. Desired color shall be subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
1014.2.2 Gutters, Valleys, Flashings Hip and Ridge roll shall be fabricated from gauge 24 (.600 mm thick) cold-rolled
plain galvanized iron sheets specially tempered steel. Profile section shall be as indicated on the Plans.
1014.2.3 Fastening hardware shall be of galvanized iron straps and rivets. G.I. straps are of .500 mm thick x 16 mm
wide x 267 mm long (gauge 26 x 5/8" x 10-1/2") and standard rivets.
1014.2.4 Base metal thickness shall correspond to the following gauge designation available locally as follows:
· a) Base Metal Thickness Designated Gauges

.400 mm thick Gauge 28
Protective Coatings Thickness
b) 1. Zinc 34.4 microns (244 gm/m2)

c)
2. Paint coatings Top coat 15.20 microns Bottom coat 6.8 microns Overall thickness with protective
coats
.400 mm .428-451 mm
d) .500 mm .532-551 mm
.600 mm .638-651 mm
· e) Length of roofing sheets -available in cut to length long span length up to 18.29 meters
· f) Special length and thickness are available by arrangements.
Before any installation work is commenced, the Contractor shall ascertain that the top faces of the purlins are in
proper alignment. Correct the alignment as necessary in order to have the top faces of the purlins on an even plane.
1014.3.1 Handling/Lifting/Positioning of Sheets
Sheets shall be handled carefully to prevent damage to the paint coating. Lift all sheets or sheet packs on to the roof
frame with the overlapping down-turned edge facing towards the side of the roof where installation will commence,
otherwise sheets will have to be turned end-to-end during installation.
· 1014.3.2.1 Start roofing installation by placing the first sheet in position with the
downturned edge in line with other building elements and fastened to supports as
recommended.
· 1014.3.2.2 Place the downturned edge of the next sheet over the edge of the first sheet, to
provide side lap and hold the side lap firmly in place.Continue the same procedure for
subsequent sheets until the whole roofing area is covered and/or (Adopt installation
procedure provided in the instruction manual for each type of Architectural molded rib profile
section).
· 1014.3.2.3 For walling applications follow the procedure for roofing. Allow a minimum end
lap of 100 mm (4”) for vertical walling.
1014.3.3 Gutters, Valleys, Flashing ridge and Hip rolls
Gutters, valleys, flashing ridge and hip rolls shall be fastened where indicated on the Plans by self-tapping screws or
galvanized iron straps and rivets.
1014.3.4 End Laps
In case handling or transport consideration requires to use two or more end lapped sheets to provide full length
coverage for the roof run, install each line of sheets from bottom to top or from eave line to apex of roof framing.
Provide 150 mm minimum end lap.
1014.3.5 Anchorage/Fastening
· 1014.3.5.1 Pre-painted steel roofing sheets shall be fastened to the wood purlins with
standard length G.I. straps and rivets.
· 1014.3.5.2 For steel frame up to 4.5 mm thick use self drilling screw No. 12 by 35 mm long
hexagonal head with neoprene washer.
· 1014.3.5.3 For steel support up to 5 mm thick or more use thread cutting screw No. 12 by
40 mm long hexagonal head with neoprene washer.
· 1014.3.5.4 Side lap fastener use self drilling screw NO.1 0 by 16 mm long hexagonal head
with neoprene washer.
· 1014.3.5.5 Valley fastened to lumber and for walling use self-drilling wood screw No. 12 by
25 mm long hexagonal head with neoprene washer.
· 1014.3.5.6 Valleys fastened to steel supports use selfdrilling screws, hexagonal head with
neoprene washer. Drill size is 5 mm diameter.
1014.3.6 Cutting of Sheets
· 1014.3.6.1 In cutting pre painted steel roofing sheets and accessories to place the exposed
color side down. Cutting shall be carried out on the ground and not over the top of other
painted roofing product.
1014.3.6.2 Power cutting or drilling to be done or carried out on pre-painted products already installed or laid in
position, the area around holes or cuts shall be masked to shield the paint from hot fillings.
1014.3.7 Storage and Protection
Pre-painted steel roofing, walling products and accessories should be delivered to the jobsite in strapped bundles.
Sheets and/or bundles shall be neatly stacked in the ground and if left in the open it shall be protected by covering
the stack materials with loose tarpauline.
The work done under this Item shall be measured by actual area covered or installed with pre-painted steel roofing
and/or walling in square meters and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer/Architect.
The area of pre-painted steel roofing and/or walling in square meters as provided in Section 1014 shall be paid for at
the unit bid or contract unit price which payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools
and incidents necessary to complete this Item.
Pay Item
Number
2
1014 (a) Pre painted metal sheets
m
ITEM 1015 -CLAY ROOF TILE

1015.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all plant, labor, tools, equipment and clay roof tiles required to complete the
roofing as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
1015.2.1 Clay Roof Tiles
Tiles shall be manufactured from red clay specie, moulded to custom tile patterns. It shall be kilned after drying to
improve natural aesthetic appearance and resistance to erosion and withstand any climaic condition in the tropics.
Where required and indicated to be glazed, color shall be approved by the Engineer.
1015.2.2 Sheathing:
a) Corrugated G.I. subroofing Corrugated
· G.I. subroofing shall be 0.50 mm thick, long span.

b) Plywood Sheathing
Plywood sheathing when used instead of G.I., shall be 12 mm thick marine plywood treated with two piles of felt
paper, asphalt impregnated.
1015.2.3 Wood Batens
Wood batens shall be 25 mm x 50 mm pressure treated lumber properly laid to fit clay roof tiles and accessories as
indicated on the Plans.
1015.2.4 Fasteners
Fasteners shall be manufactured from non-corrosive materials. Nails shall have large head with sufficient length to
give 19 mm penetration on wood battens and #16 tie wires to be copper of brass as the case maybe.
Before any work is started the Contractor shall secure approved roof framing Plan and determine/evaluate actual site
condition. In case modification is necessary the Contractor shall submit shop drawings to the Engineer for approval.
1015.3.1 Preparatory Work
Battens shall be installed in straight lines, level, squared and firm. It may rest on sheathing and anchored rigidly by
means of galvanized iron straps 0.60 mm thick riveted on sheathing, or nailed on top chord or jack rafter when it rests
on plywood sheathing. Top chord or jack rafter shall have at least a minimum roof pitch of 250 degrees. Plywood
sheathing shall be overlaid with two plies of felt paper, asphalt impregnated to control moisture. Battens shall be
spaced to fit the clay roof tiles and accessories.
1015.3.2 Tinsmithry Works (Gutters, Valleys)
Gutters and valleys shall be set in place before wood battens are installed. Use 0.60 mm thick (gauge 24) plain
galvanized iron sheet moulded true to profile section indicated on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
1015.3.3 Clay Roof Tiles on Concrete Roof Slab
Provide and install pressure treated lumber 25 mm x 50 mm or metal strips properly aligned, level squared and firm.
Apply waterproofing on slab surface to control moisture by cold process.
1015.3.4 Clay Roof Tile Installation Procedure
· 1015.3.4.1 Start laying at the lower layer from right to left. See to it that the left anchorage
of tile is placed near or close to hip truss as much as possible.
· 1015.3.4.2 Continue to the next layer of clay roof tiles following the same procedure. After
all clay roof tiles are laid out, mark the clay roof tiles at hips and valleys which are to be cut
using straight edge or string as guide.
· 1015.3.4.3 Cut one by one tiles that the application of clay roof tile accessories and fill
opening under roll of tile with mortar. Color to match the clay roof tile installed.
· 1015.3.4.4 Install hip stringer and cut hips on job.Where tiles join hip stringer, provide
waterproof elastic cement.Cement hip roll and ridge in lap and fasten with nails/tie wires as
specified.Fill voids at hip starters and ridge ends with mortar, color to match tile.
1015.3.4.5 Remove all debris and clean roof area ready for service.
This Item shall be measured by actual roof area laid with clay roof tiles and accessories in square meters or part
thereof, for work completed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The accepted work quantified and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the unit Bid price which
constitutes full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment and other incidentals necessary to
complete this Item.
Pay Item
Number
2
1015 (a) Clay roof tile
m
ITEM 1016 -WATERPROOFING

1016.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all waterproofing materials, labor, tools, equipment and other facilities and
undertaking the proper installation works required as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
1016.2.1 Cement-base Waterproofing
· 1016.2.1.1 Cement-base waterproofing powder mix shall be cement-base, aggregate type,

heavy duty, water-proof coating for reinforced concrete surface and masonry exposed to
water. The aggregates are graded and sized so as to mesh perfectly and are selected for
purity, hardness, strength and are non-metallic. When mixed with other ingredients are free
flowing, water-proof coatings that possesses strength durability and density.
1016.2.1.2Additive binders shall be of special formulation of acrylic polymers and modifiers in liquid form used as
additive with cement-base powder mix that improves adhesion and mechanical properties.
· 1016.2.1.3 Water shall be clean, clear and potable.
1016.2.2 Membrane Waterproofing
1016.2.2.1 Primer shall be of asphalt cold applied, free from water and other foreign matters, and shall conform to the
specifications requirement defined in ASTM 0-41.
· 1016.2.2.2 Built-up membrane shall be made of smoothly woven fibers that are impervious
to acid, heat, and dampness and totting. It should permit complete penetration of asphalt
compound or bituminous coating in the woven glass fiber.
· 1016.2.2.3 Preformed membrane shall be self-sealing flexible cold applied bituminous
sheets bonded to 0.15 mm thick polyethylene film.
1016.2.2.4Mopping Materials
· a)Type A soft adhesive self-sealing asphalt for structure below ground level.
· b)Type B where asphalt is not exposed on temperature exceeding 51.7 celcius for structure
above ground level.
· c)Type C where asphalt is exposed on vertical surface in direct sunlight or above
temperature of 51.7 Celsius structure above ground level.
· 1016.2.3 Liquid waterproofing alternate material shall be of elastomeric or other substances
applied in liquid form and cured to an impervious membrane.
1016.2.3 Hydrolithic Waterproofing
· a)Hydrolithic waterproofing mix shall be of heavy cement-based coating compatible to

reinforced concrete wall. It must prevent built-up of water vapor which causes blistering,
flaking and peeling of paint films.
· b)Material must thoroughly fill and seal pores and voids that it can be used against water
pressure on the interior surface of walls below grade.
Roof decks, balconies, toilet and bathrooms, gutters, parapet walls and other areas indicated on the plans to be
waterproof shall first be rendered with cement-based waterproofing before any type of waterproofing is applied.
1016.3.1 Surface Preparation
· 1016.3.1.1 Concrete surface to be applied with waterproofing shall be structurally sound,

clean and free of dirt, loose mortar particles, paints films oil, protective coats, efflorescence
laitance, etc.
· 1016.3.1.2 All defects shall be properly corrected and carefully formed to provide a smooth
surface that is free of marks and properly cured prior to application works.
· 1016.3.1.3 Inside corners where vertical and horizontal structure meet shall be provided
with cants measuring 50 mm by 50 mm or rounded at corners a minimum of 50 mm radius.
· a) Concrete slabs shall be properly graded to drain rainwater. Provide a minimum pitch of 1
on 100 satisfactorily drain rainwater freely into the drainage lines, gutters and downspouts.
· b) Drainage connections and weep holes shall be set to permit the free flow of water.
· c) Any expansion and contraction joints shall be cleaned, primed, fitted with a backing rod
and caulked with sealant.
· d) Provide reglets of about 40 mm deep by 40 mm wide and 250 mm above floor finish
along walls or parapets for the termination of the membrane.
· e) Prepared surfaces shall be cured and kept wet by sprinkling with water at regular
intervals for a period of at least three days and allow surface to actually set within seven days.
· f) Ensure that the prepared surface has completely set and all defects repaired.
· g) When there is reasonable doubt as to the presence of moisture in the surface to be
applied with membrane expose that same direct to sunlight for another 2 days or heat all
suspected area using blow torch.
1016.3.2 Preformed or built-up membrane
1016.3.2.1Application procedure
· a) Prior to application of membrane concrete surfaces should be sound and cured without
the use of curing compound. Apply a coat of concrete neutralizer to remove oil dirt’s and other
contaminants.
· b) Apply asphalt primer at the rate of one gallon per 100 square feet evehly by spraying or
by paint brush.
· c) Application shall be done one direction strip by and overlapping each other to assure
uniform thickness.
· d) Allow primer to dry until it is ready to receive next coat or layer as specified in the
manufacturing instructional manual.
· e) As soon as primer coating is workable, lay a single layer of preformed or built-up
membrane smoothly free from irregularities and folds.
· f) Lay preformed or built up membrane conforming to size and shape of the surface area to
be covered.
· g) Carefully lay side and end laps in order to assure an even thickness throughout the
whole, surface area to be covered.
· h) When the whole surface area is completely covered apply a single coat of asphalt primer
at the rate of 3 to 4 gallons per (100 square feet).
· i) Meshes of treated woven glass fibers shall not be completely closed or sealed by the
primer coat, but shall sufficiently open to allow successive mopping of the ply material to seep
through.
· j) Cover ply not more than the minimum amount of surfacing necessary to prevent sticking
on ply.
· k) After application surface shall be uniformly smooth, free from irregularities folds and
knots.
· l) Repeat the procedures until 5 plies have been satisfactorily installed or as many layers
required or specified in the plans.
· m) Where weather disturbance interrupt the work and exposing the membrane to moisture
remove the layer exposed to moisture and repeat procedure until completion of the process.
1016.3.2.2Protective Coatings
· a) Where laying of the built-up or preformed membrane conforms with the number of plies
required as shown on the plans lay a mixture or sand mastic in the proportion of one part
asphalt or bituminous material and four parts coarse screened sand by volume. With a steel
trowel at an average of 3 mm thick over the surface of membrane.
· b) Then at the rate of one gallon per (100 square feet) apply aluminum heat reflecting finish
thoroughly over the dried sand mastic coating.
1016.3.2.3Metal Cap Flashing
· a) Provide cap flashing gauge 24 plain G.I. where shown on the Plans.
· b) Where cap flashing is connected to preformed lock in through-wall form upper edge' of
cap flashing to engage .in preformed lock. Mallet lock down tight to provide a spring action
against base flashing.
· c) Then at the rate of one gallon per (100 square feet) apply aluminum heat reflecting finish
thoroughly over the dried sand mastic coating.
· d) Where cap flashing is terminated in raked joints or in prepared masonry or stone reglet
fasten flashing with wedge every 12 inches and fill reglet on vertical surfaces continuous with
plastic cement and on horizontal surfaces, continuous with molten lead.
1016.3.3 Membrane Waterproofing Cement Topping
· a) Provide concrete cement topping of at least 50 mm thick on the membrane after five
days where protective coatings has been applied.
· b) Concrete cement topping should be class "A" with 9 mm pea gravel and preferably
provided with 2-way 6 mm dia. temperature steel bars.
1016.3.4 Liquid Waterproofing as Membrane
Before any coat of liquid waterproofing is applied concrete cement surface shall conform to the requirement defined
in sub-section 1017.3.1.1.
1016.3.4.1Application procedure
· a) Prior to application of membrane concrete surfaces should be sound and cured without
the use of curing compound. Apply a coat of concrete neutralizer to removed oil, dirt and
other contaminants.
· b)Apply a primer coat of elastomeric coating standard of the manufacturer at the rate of 1/3
gallon per 9.28 meter square 100 square feet over the surface area to be applied.
· c) After the primer coat has dried penetrating and sealing the concrete surface areas
coated apply 25 dry mills of coating at the rate of one gallon per 100 square meters for 3
coatings on the same concrete surface areas coated with liquid waterproofing.
· d) The concrete surface areas coated shall be allowed to dry in twenty four hours if relative
humility is above 4.44 Celsius.
· e) Liquid waterproofing membrane may be applied by paint brushairless spray, notched
trowel, squeegee or roller preferably 20-25 mills maximum thickness each wet coat.
1016.3.4.2 Precaution
· a) Liquid waterproofing membrane should not be applied unless the ambient temperature is
4.44 Celcius or higher and should not proceed during inclement weather condition.
· b) Extra care shall be observed by persons doing the application works especially those
that have skin sensitiveness must wear gloves while applying the liquid waterproofing. The
liquid water-proofing membrane compound is highly combustible.
1016.3.5 Protection of membrane waterproofing surfaces in general.
· a) Concrete topping in situation where it is desirable to have a bond between membrane
waterproofing and topped slab it is recommended that the concrete topping be placed as the
membrane dries, usually 48 hours after final coat is applied.
· b) If a bond is not required, the membrane should be protected with asphalt asbestos board
or asphalt felt paper such time as topping or concrete covering is applied. Prior to topping or
placing concrete covering the membrane shall be inspected and initiate repair work where
necessary.
· c) Exposed membrane surfaces at concrete gutters and areas not frequently disturbed may
be allowed.
· d) Membrane waterproofing at basement shall be covered and,' protected' by installing
tightly butted asphalt impregnated protection boards with a minimum thickness of 6 mm and
preferably 12 mm on horizontal areas.
All projections and pipes must be protected with asbestos cloth approximately'6 mm thick. Install the bituminous
paving with extra care to avoid damage, lift or curl the underlying protection boards.
This Item shall be measured in square meters for areas actually rendered with membrane waterproofing and number
of packages for integrally waterproofed areas accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 1017.4 shall be paid for at the Contract unit price for
integral and membrane waterproofing work which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and
applying integral and membrane waterproofing materials including the use of equipment and tools, labor and
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
Pay Item Description Unit of Number Measurement
2
1016 (a) Cement-base waterproofing
m
2
1016 (b) Liquid waterproofing
m
Built-up and Preformed 2

1016 (c)
membrane m
ITEM 1017 -ROOF DRAINS WITH STRAINERS

1017.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all items, articles, plant, equipment, labor and materials and performing all
methods necessary or required for the complete installation of all roof drains with strainers in accordance with all
applicable drawings as shown on the approved Plans.
The roof drains with strainers specified herein shall be from the "JOSAM' catalog of the JOSAM Manufacturing
Company, Michigan City, Indiana, notwithstanding what are shown on the Plans. The series and type number herein
designate the quality and style, design and operation material and finish of drains desired. Any drain with strainer of
approved equivalent locally made may be substituted subject to the approval of the Engineer. Equivalent materials, if
locally available will be acceptable.
Should the series and type numbers specified herein be not suitable to a particular location due to concrete space
limitation, an adequation of the series specified of the same size, body materials and finish may be, substituted
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide, fit and install all necessary drains with trainers where so shown or indicated on the
Plans, and/or where the engineer directs. Each drain with strainer shall fit well without leaks into 1e corresponding
downspout or conductor over which it is to be installed and in accordance with the following schedule:
Roof Eaves and Gutter
Where so indicated on the Plan, "JOSAM" series 4820-BF, type 4823-BP, cast iron lacquer finish, roof drain with
round flange, cast iron rough brass high dome secured to clamping ring by screws, 4-inch deep body (for locally
made, 6-inch deep body) with bottom outlet; for "side outlet" "JOSAM" series 4870-BP, type 4873-BP, series 4863-
BP.
Any other roof drain shown on the Plans not specified herein or neither shown on the Plans, but necessary to leave
the work complete, shall be provided and fitted by the contractor suitable to the service required and fitted to the
concrete limitations at the point of installation, based on or similar to those specified herein.
All roof drains with strainers actually installed shall be measured and determined by the number of pieces or units
ready for services as provided in the Bill of Quantities accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The items measured and determined as provided in subsection 1017.4 shall be paid for at the unit bid price which
payment constitute full compensation of materials, labor and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
Pay Item
Description Unit of measurement
Number
Roof drains with

1017 pcs/ set
strainers
ITEM 1018 -CERAMIC TILES

1018.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all ceramic tiles and cementitious materials, tools and equipment including labor
required in undertaking the proper installation of walls and floor tiles as shown on the Plans and in accordance with
this Specification.
1018.2.1 Ceramic tiles and trims shall be made of clay, or a mixture of clay and other materials which is called the
body of the tile. Tile bodies are classified by ASTM C 242 as to their degree of water absorption. Ceramic tiles and
trims are manufactured either by dust-pressed process in which the clays are ground to dust mixed with a minimum
of water shaped in steel dies and then fired or by plastic process in which the clays are made plastic by mixing with
water, shaped by extrusion or in molds and then fired.
1018.2.1.1 Glazed Tiles and Trims
Glazed tiles' and trims shall have an impervious face of ceramic materials fused onto the body of the tiles and trims.
The glazed surface may be clear white or colored depending on the color scheme approved by the Engineer.
Standard glazes may be bright (glossy) semimatte (Less glossy) matte (dull) or crystalline (mottled and textured;
good resistance to abrasion). Glazed tiles are used principally for walls; crystalline glazed tiles may be used for floors
provided how8ver that these are used as light duty floors.
1018.2.1.2 Unglazed Tiles
Unglazed tiles shall be hard dense tile of homogeneous composition.
Its color and characteristics are determined by the materials used in the body, the method of manufacture and the
thermal treatment. It is used primarily for floors and walks.
1018.2.1.3 Trims
Trims are manufactured to match wall tile color, texture and to coordinate with it in dimension. These are shaped in
various ceramic trim units such as caps, bases, coves, bullnoses, corners, angles, etc.that are necessary for edging
or making a transition between intersecting planes.
1018.2.1.4 Accessories
Accessories like some soap holders and shall be made wall mounted type with colors to reconcile with the color of
the adjacent wall tiles.
1018.2.1.5 Cement
Cement shall be Portland conforming to the specification requirements defined in Item 700, Hydraulic Cement.
1018.2.1.6 Sand
Sand shall be well graded fine aggregate clean river sand, free from soluble salts and organic impurities.
1018.2.1.7 Lime
Lime shall be hydrated lime with free un hydrated oxide and magnesium oxide content not to exceed 8 percent by
weight.
Tile work shall not be started until roughing-ins for plumbing, electrical and other trades have been completed and
tested. The work of all other trades shall be protected from damage. 1018.3.1Surface Preparation
· a) Mortar mix for scratch coat and setting bed shall consist of one part Portland cement 1/4
part lime and 3 parts sand by volume. Surface to receive tile must be level, true to elevation,
dry, free from dirt, oil and other ointments. Allow at least seven days curing of scratch coat
and setting bed.
· Installation work shall not be allowed to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected. b) Bond coat shall be portland cement paste.
· 1018.3.1.1 Thoroughly dampen surfaces of masonry or concrete walls before scratch coat
is applied.
· 1018.3.1.2 On masonry or concrete surface first apply a thin coat with pressure, then bring
it out sufficiently to compensate for the major irregularities of the surface to a thickness not
less than 10 mm. at any point.
· 1018.3.1.3 Evenly rate scratch coat to provide good mechanical key before the mortar mix
has fully hardened.
1018.3.2Installation Procedure Ceramic tiles shall be soaked in clean water prior to installation for a minimum of one hour
1018.3.2.1Ceramic Glazed Wall Tiles
· a) Determine and mark layout of ceramic tiles, joint location, position of trims and fixtures
so as to minimize cut less than one-half tile in size.
· b) Thoroughly dampen surface of wall but do not saturate surface.
· c) Apply a bond coat mix with consistency of cream paste 1.5 mm thick to the wall surface
or to the back of the tile to be laid.
· d) Lay the tiles true to profile then exert pressure and tamp tile surface before the bond
coat mix has initially set.
· e) Continue with the next full tile to be laid and pressed firmly upon the setting bed tamped
until flush and in place of the other tiles.
· f) Intersections and returns shall be formed accurately using the appropriate trims.
· g) All lines shall be kept straight and true to profiles, plumbed and internal corners rounded
using the appropriate trims.
1018.3.2.2Vitrified Unglazed Floor Tiles
· a) Before tire is applied the floor surface shall be tested for levelness or uniformity of slope
by' flooding it with water. Area where water ponds are filled or levelled, shall be retested
before the setting bed is applied.
· b) Establish Ijnes of borders and center of the walls at the field work in both direction to
perrhit the pattern to be laid with a minimum of cut tiles.
· c) Clean concrete subfloor then moisten but do not soak. Then sprinkle dry cement over the
surface and spread the mortar on the setting bed.
· d) Apply and spread mortar mix for setting bed and tamp to assure good bond over the
entire area to be laid with tile.
· e) Pitch floor to drain as shown on Plans or as directed by the Engineer
· f) Allow the setting bed to set sufficiently to be worked over then spread a bond coat over
the surface and lay tile in accordance with Items 1019'.3.2.1 a, b, c,d, e, f, g.
1018.3.3 Grouting and Pointing
· 1018.3.3.1 Tiles shall have laid in place for at least 24 hours before grouting of the joints is
started. Grouting mortar shall be white Portland cement or blended with pigments to acquire
the color appropriate for the ceramic tile.
· 1018.3.3.2 Grouting mortar shall be applied over the tile by float or squeegee stroked
diagonally across the joints. Remove excess mortar with a wet sponge stroked diagonally or
in a circular motion after 12-15 minutes. Follow with a barely damp or dry sponge to remove
remaining haze while smoothing all grouted joints.
1018.3.3 Cleaning
· a) Clean ceramic tile surfaces thoroughly as possible upon completion of grouting.

· b) Remove all grout haze, observing tile manufacturers recommendations as to use of acid
or chemical cleaners.
· c) Rinse tile thoroughly with clean water before and after using chemical cleaners.
· d) Polish surface of tile with soft cloth.
1018.3.4 Protection from Construction Dirt
· a) Apply a protective coat of neutral cleanser solution diluted with water in the proportion of
1:4 or 1 liter cleanser concentrate to 1 gallon water.
· b) In addition, cover tile flooring with heavy-duty no staining construction paper, taped in
place.
· c) Just before final acceptance of the work remove paper and rinse protective coat of
neutral cleaner from tile surface. Do not let protective paper get torn 'or removed.
All works performed under this Item shall be measured in square meters for areas actually laid with ceramic tiles and
accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Ceramic tile work determined and provided in the Bill of Bill of Quantities shall be paid for based at the unit bid price
which price and payment constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, tools, equipment and other
incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
2
1018.2.1.1 Glazed tiles and trims
m
2
1018.2.1.2 Unglazed tiles
m
ITEM 1019 -WOOD TILES

1019.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and installing of wood tiles on the area indicated on the Plans and in conformity
with this Specification.
Wood tile flooring shall be Narra, Tanguile or other wood specie, kiln-dried of not more than fourteen percent (14 %)
moisture content of the best quality manufactured locally.
1019.2.1 Wood tiles shall have a minimum dimension of 150 mm x 150 mm x 19 mm. Two-ply pieces shall be
prefabricated by the manufacturer into rectangular, square or other block shapes as designed and secured together
by wood splints, set into ends or sides.
1019.2.2 Adhesive shall be waterproof glue. The consistency of the adhesive shall suit local conditions at the time of
laying and the quality of the adhesive shall be such as to bind the wood tiles permanently to the subfloors.
No work shall be started until plastering on the interior surfaces of walls has been completed and dry windows and
glazings are installed, and exterior doors are completely operational.
Before wood tiles are laid, sub-floors shall be perfectly dry, thoroughly cured, level and true to elevation as required
on the Plans.
Wood parquet tiles shall be installed by the manufacturer, this type of job being a specialty trade to assure of the type
of adhesive, the proper equipment and tools and the guarantee of quality and workmanship and other considerations.
The following installation instructions shall be followed strictly:-
· a) Provide adequate cross ventilation as a drying aid during the installation of wood tile.
· b) Clean thoroughly the area over which wood tile will be installed or laid and make certain
that the surface over which the material will be held is dry.
· c) Plan and mark carefully installation layout.
· d) Spread enough adhesive to permit the laying of two (2) to three (3) wood tile blocks at a
time beginning at the starting lines marked.
· e) Lay the wood tile on surface coated with adhesive and apply hard pressure to seat the
materials firmly.
· f) After laying, dampen the gummed paper then pell it off.
· g) Adjust and reseat, when necessary, any individual fillets without decreasing the spacing
between individual fillets.
· h) Allow a drying period of 24 hours; then smooth surface using an electric sanding
machine with the proper number of sand paper grit.
· i) Seal all defects exposed upon the process of sanding if manageable, otherwise the
defective wood tile shall be remove and replaced with new wood tile without extra cost.
· j) Whenever necessary scrape carefully with a hand scraper tool and thoroughly sandpaper
smooth works near to walls, corners and other parts which cannot be reach by the electric
sanding machine.
1019.3.2 Precaution
Wood tile shall be laid so as to provide a free open space for expansion around sides of room, such space shall be to
equal to 5 mm for each meter in width and or length of room. Clearance between trims and floor shall be at least 1.6
mm. Expansion joints at doorways shall be covered by saddle.
Temperature of room shall be maintained at approximately 85° degrees Fahrenheit during laying.
Adhesive shall be applied in strict compliance with manufacturer's manual. Mastic shall be spread to a minimum
thickness of 24 mm with a notch spreader.
1019.3.3 Guaranty
The Contractor shall furnish a written notice that work under this Item will be free from defects for a period of one (1)
year from the date of final acceptance of the work.
Defects such as creaking, loosening, lifting, cracking, bulging, splitting, undue warping and undue shrinkage shall be
adjusted.
This guaranty will not apply to defects covered by failure of the work of others, if such defects were impossible to
detect at the time of the examination of other works, or defects caused by other than the wear and tear of normal
service.
All works performed under this Item shall be measured in square meters based on actual wood tile installed in the
building.
The quantified area determined and as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the unit Bid or Contract
unit Price which payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools and incidentals necessary
to complete this Item.
2
1019 (a) Narra wood tile
m
2
1019 (b) Tanguile wood tile
m
2
1019 (c) Other specie as specified
m
ITEM 1020 -VINYL FLOOR TILES

1020.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all vinyl tiles and fitting accessories, adhesive materials, labor, tools equipment
and the satisfactory performance in undertaking the proper installation of vinyl tile flooring as shown on the Plans and
in accordance with this Specification.
1020.2.1 Vinyl Tiles
Vinyl tiles shall be of first grade quality measuring 300 mm x 300 mm x 3 mm thick, fully homogeneous, flexible,
resilient and resistant to alkali moisture, grease and oil. The color and design pattern of vinyl tile shall be uniformly
distributed throughout the thickness of the tile.
1020.2.2 Adhesive
Adhesive shall be best suited for tropical application and compatible with the vinyl tiles to be installed.
1020.2.3 Seal Polish
Seal polish shall be plastic emulsion suited for the particular type of floor as recommended by the vinyl tile
manufacturer.
1020.3.1.1 General: Installation of the tile shall not commence until the work of other trades. including painting has
been completed. The Contractor shall' carefully examine all surfaces over which the tiles are to be set. Floor
'surfaces that are to receive vinyl tile shall be clean thoroughly, dry, smooth, firm and sound and free from oil, paint,
wax, dirt and any other damaging material.
1020.3.1.2 Tile Laying Design
The tile laying design shall be indicated on Plans and in the colors selected and approved by the Engineer for each
area. All joints shall beparallel to wall lines. Where line patterns of tile run perpendicular to lines of other tiles, they
shall be laid truly at right angles.
1020.3.1.3 Adhesive
Adhesive shall be applied in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's printed directions, unless specified or
directed otherwise.
Smoking, the use of open flames and other sources of ignition are strictly prohibited in the area where solvent
containing adhesive are being used or spread.
1020.3.1.4 Application of the Tile
Start in the center of the room or area and work from the center towards the edges. Keep tile lines and joints square,
symmetrical, tight and even; and keep each floor in a true, level plane, except where indicated as sloped. Vary edge
width as necessary to maintain full size tiles in the field but no edge tile shall be less than one half the field tile sizes,
except where irregular shaped rooms make it impossible.
1020.3.1.5 Cutting
Cut vinyl floor tile to and fit around all permanent fixtures, pipes and outlets. Cut edges, fit and scribe to walls and
partition after flooring has been applied.
1020.3.1.6 Edge Strips
Provide edging strips where flooring terminates at points higher at doorways where thresholds are provided. Edge
strip shall be extruded aluminum butty type and beveled at exposed edges. The top surface of the metal strips shall
be finished flush with the tiles.
Secure strips at the end and between at about 200 mm apart with screws. Submit samples of metal strips for
approval before application and installation.
1020.3.1.7 Cleaning and Waxing
After the vinyl tiles and accessories are laid and set, it shall be cleaned with a cleaner as recommended by the
manufacturer and a cost of approved seal polish.
1020.3.1.8 Protection
After the floor has been waxed, they shall be carefully protected against damage, either with heavy building paper or
by keeping traffic off the floors until the area is ready for use.
All works performed under this section shall be measured in square meters/linear meters or actual numbers of vinyl
floor tiles installed complete with accessories and ready for service.
The actual area in square, linear meters or number of Quantities shall be the basis of payment based on the unit bid
or contract unit price.
Pay Item Number
1020
Description Vinyl Floor Tile m2 0r lnm or No. of places
Unit of Measurement
ITEM 1021 -CEMENT FLOOR FINISH

1021.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, labor, tools and equipment in undertaking cement floor finishing
where shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
Manufactured materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original unbroken packages or containers which are
labeled plainly with the manufacturer's name and trademark.
1021.2.1 Cement
Portland cement shall conform to the requirement of Item 700, Hydraulic Cement.
1021.2.2 Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregates shall be clean, washed, Sharp River sand and free from dirt, clay, organic matter or other
deleterious substances. Sand derived from crushed gravel or stone may be used with the Engineer's approval but in
no case shall such sand be derived from stone unsuitable for use as coarse aggregate.
1021.2.3 Coloring Material
The coloring material shall be red or green oxide powder of the quality capable of achieving the best staining power
and homogeneity.
1021.2.4 Metallic Floor Hardener (Premix)
Metallic floor hardener shall be a mixture of oil-free specially graded clean iron particles, mineral oxide pigment and
Portland cement binder, premixed according to the manufacturer's instruction manual.
1021.2.5Non-Metallic Floor Hardener
· a) Powder type hardener shall be silica quartz aggregates, workability admixtures, mineral
oxide pigments and Portland cement mixed according to the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
· b) Epoxy type topping hardener shall be a combination of epoxy resins filled with hard and
natural emery or silica quartz aggregates, premixed according to the manufacturer's
instruction manual.
1 021.3.1 Mixture
Concrete topping materials shall be measured accurately in accordance with the following:
· a) Mortar topping shall be one (1) part Portland cement and three (3) parts fine aggregate
by loose volume.
· b) Finish topping shall be pure Portland cement properly graded conforming to the
requirements of Item 700, Hydraulic Cement, mixed with water to approved consistency and
plasticity. Where required to be colored cement floor finish, red or green oxide powder shall
be premixed with Portland cement complying with finish topping requirements and the desired
color intensity. Cement floor finish floor hardener shall be premixed as required and applied in
accordance with the manufacturer's instruction manual.
1021.3.2 Preparation of Concrete Surface
Surface to receive mortar concrete topping shall be cleaned of all projections, dust, loose particles and other foreign
matters.
Finish elevation shall be established over the areas indicated on the Plans.
Before any mortar concrete topping is applied, the prepared concrete base surface shall first be wetted and grouted
with Portland cement.
· a) Mortar topping of the thickness specified on the Plans, shall be spread over the prepared
concrete base and shall be float finished using wood hand trowel. Batches of mortar topping
shall be emplaced within one hour of mixing thereof.
· b) As soon as the water sheen has disappeared the surface shall be lightly scratched with a
stiff bristle broom
· c) The finish topping mixture whether plain, colored, or with floor hardener shall be spread
over the lightly scratched surface before final set taken place and hand troweled to produce a
smooth surface.
· d) The finished surface shall be free of trowel marks, have uniform texture and true to a
plane within an allowable tolerance of 3 mm in 3.0 meters.
· 1021.3.4 Protection of Finished Surface
Cement floor finished surface shall be covered with burlap or appropriate covering to avoid injurious action by sun,
rain, flowing water and mechanical injury.
· 1021.3.5 Workmanship
Cement floor shall be finished level and true to finish elevation as shown on the Plans Finish topping shall have no
visible junction marks where one (1) day's work adjoins the other. V-cut groove lines shall be provided where shown
on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
All cement floor finish shall be measured in square meters or part thereof tor work actually completed and accepted.
The work actually completed and accepted as measured in square meters shall be paid for at the Unit Price or
contract price which price constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete this Item.
Pay Item
Number
2
1021 (a) Plain cement floor finish
m
2
1021 (b) Colored cement floor finish
m
2
1021 (c) Cement floor finish with floor hardener
m
ITEM 1022 -STUCCO FINISH

1022.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, tools, equipment including labor required in undertaking the proper
application of stucco finish as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specifications.
1022.2.1 Cement
Portland cement (white or ordinary gray) shall conform with the specification requirements defined in Item 700,
Hydraulic Cement.
1022.2.2 Marble Dust
Marble dust shall be derived from domestic marble that are hard and well graded.
1022.2.3 Acoustical Fiber
Acoustical fiber materials shall be first grade quality and a product distributed by a reputable manufacturer engaged
in acoustical material.
Well surface and other masonry areas indicated on the Plans to receive stucco shall be cleaned of all projection, dust
loose particles andforeign matters. It shall be thoroughly wetted with potable water before application of scratch coat.
1022.3.2Type of Mixture
· a) For stucco used as acoustical treatment the proportion shall be 1 part cement and three
parts acoustical fiber measured by volume or as recommended by the acoustical
manufacturer.For exterior and interior walls without acoustical treatment the proportion shall
be one (1) part cement blended with two parts marble dust in the case where white cement is
used but for ordinary gray cement use one (1) part cement and two parts washed sand with
1/2 part lime measured by volume.
1022.3.3Installation or Application Methods
· a) Stucco mixture can be applied with the use of hard brooms made from coconut material.
· b) It can also be applied using sandblasting equipments operated manually or electrical
driven machine compressor
· c) For an impressive architectural (appearance) effect the applied surface is slightly
troweled before stucco mix has began to set. This surface finish is also called anay finish.
Stucco finish shall be properly applied true to details, squared and plumbed.
All stucco finish shall be measured in square meters or part thereof for work actually completed in the building.
The work quantified and determined in subsection 1033.4 as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the
Contract Unit Price which price constitutes full compensation for all stucco finish necessary to complete this Item.
Pay Item
Description
Number
1022 (a) Stucco Finish
Unitof Measurement
2m
ITEM 1023 GRANOLITHIC MARBLE WORK

1023.1 Description
The contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install granolithic marble
flooring where shown on the Plans and specified herein.
The contractor shall submit 300 mm x 300 mm samples of granolithic marble flooring to the Engineer for approval,
showing the color texture, finish and materials including an outline of the proposed method of surface preparation
and the installation of the granolithic marble flooring. Included shall be the details of where and how the divider strips
shall be installed.
1023.2.1 Marble Chips (Granules)
Marble chips shall be standard quarry products of the size and color necessary to match the approved samples.
White and Ordinary Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C 150 Type I: and relevant Philippine National Standard.
1023.2.3 Divider Strips
Divider strips shall be the brass angle type of 3 mm thickness spaced at 600 mm on centers.
The extent of granolithic flooring areas shall be as indicated in the Finish Schedule and as shown on the Plans.
The divider strips shall be installed at least 24 hours, prior to application of the granolithic mix with the tops protruding
to a minimum of 0.8 mm above the projected finish floor elevation.
Place the granolithic mix and trowel to level surface. Trowel led surface shall be seeded with additional chips if
required.
1023.3.2 Curing
The granolithic topping shall be cured at least six (6) days before grinding or until such time when it has set
sufficiently hard to permit machine grinding or rubbing with coarse carborandum grit without disclosing any surface
aggregate.
1023.3.3 Surfacing
After curing all granolithic topping surfaces shall wet and ground with electric grinding machine to a smooth and even
surface. Where it is not possible to use electric grinding machine, surface shall be hand-rubbed.Use No. 24 abrasive
grit stone for the initial rubbing, then followed by No.40 abrasive grit stone rubbing, after which a light grouting of
white Portland cement paste (grout) of creamy consistency as the matrix used in thetopping. Grout shall remain on
the surface until the time of final grinding and cleaning.
1023.3.4 Finishing
Allow at least 72 hours after th8 granolithic surface have been grouted before removing the grout coat (cleaning and
fine stone grinding) by electric grinding machine using no coarser than No. 80 abrasive grit.
Final grinding or rubbing of granolithic marble surface shall remove scratches and produce a true surface of uniform
color and texture without objectionable irregularities of any description as that of the approved samples.
1023.3.5 Cleaning, Waxing and Polishing
Upon completion of final grinding or rubbing of granolithic marble the Contractor shall apply two coats of natural wax
penetrating type. Surface shall be allowed to dry and polished.
All granolithic marble finish indicated on the Plans and described herein shall be measured in square lineal meters or
part thereof for work completed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The quantified area determined in the preceding section and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the
Unit Bid or contract Unit Price.

Number
1023 (a) Corridors m2
Stairs Landing, risers,

1023 (b) square, linear m.
etc.
1023 (c) Rooms and others m2
ITEM 1024 -PEA GRAVEL WASHOUT FINISH

1024.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, labor, tools and' equipment required in undertaking the proper
application of pea-gravel washout finish as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
1024.2.1 Pea Gravel
Pea gravel specie shall be of well grades sizes consisting of 4 mm to 8 mm round variation wash river gravel.
1024.2.2 Cement
Portland cement shall conform to the specification requirements defined in Item 700, Hydraulic Cement. Use one
brand of Portland cement throughout the pea gravel washout finish mix.
All pea gravel washout finish shall be done by me:l experienced and qualified to do this particular type of trade. The
contractor shall submit at least two (2) samples to the Engineer/Architect for approval measuring 300 mm x 300 mm
showing its color, texture and design patterns.
1024.3.1Surface Preparation
· a) Walks, ramps, driveways and elsewhere indicated on the Plans as pea gravel washout
finish -Shall be properly sloped and rendered under bed.
· b) The underbed mixture shall be spread to bring mortar underbed to a level of 16 mm
below the finish floor line.
· c) For concrete masonry walls, columns etc. the surface to be applied shall be first
rendered a scratch coat and made true to plane, leveled plumbed and squared then allowed
to cure for seven (7) days.
· 1024.3.2 Mixture and Proportion
Pea gravel washout mix shall consist of one part Portland cement and two (2) parts pea gravel measured by volume
or a proportion equivalent to 1:2. Mixtures shall be in approved containers to ensure that the specified materials are
controlled and accurately measured.Mixture measured by shovel or shovel counts will not be permitted.Unless
specified otherwise pea gravel washout mix shall be in the proportion by volume in approved mixing machines or
mortar boxes. The aggregates introduced and mixed in such a manner that the materials will be uniformly distributed
through -out the mass. A sufficient amount of water shall be added gradually and the mass further mixed until a
mortar plasticity necessary for the purpose intended is obtained. Mortar boxes, pans etc. where mixtures are mixed
shall be kept clean and free from debris or dried mortar.
1024.3.3Application
· a) Before, work is started; the slope for drainage should be properly done and provided in
the underbed prepared. Concrete setting bed must be rough and all loose particles or
anything which diminish bond shall be thoroughly cleaned off. The concrete underbed must
be kept wet for at least four (4) hours before the pea gravel mix is applied.
· b) Pea gravel washout mix shall be applied with pressure to obtain solid adhesion to the
underbed and setting bed. The finished surface shall be firm, even and monolithically applied.
When the surface applied with pea gravel mix has sufficiently set the cement paste shall be
removed by use of sponge or water spraying equipment used in this specialty trade in order to
expose the pea gravel quarter face but still intact.
1024.3.4 Curing, Cleaning and Finishing
As soon as possible as the pea gravel are exposed to desire appearance the surface shall be covered with damp
burlap or other approved covers. At the proper time when surface are semi-dry and stable allowing the applied
surface to cure?
1024.3.5 Protection
For proper curing, keep the pea gravel washout finish moistened for a period of at least seven (7) days by thoroughly
welting the surface three (3) times a day and protecting it from the strong rays of the sun with burlap of layer of sand.
Upon completion of the work and the surface has completely seasoned wash with clean water and brush thoroughly
to produce a clean and sparkling appearance and protected until work has been accepted.
All works done under this Item shall be measured in square meters/ lineal meter or part thereof for work completed
and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The quantity determined in Item 1018.4 Method of Measurement shall be paid for at the unit bid or contract unit price
as stated in the Bill of Quantities, which price constitute full compensation including labor materials, 100ls and
incidentals to complete this Item.
Pay Item
Number
1024 (a) Pea-Gravel washout finish In/m2
ITEM 1025 -BUSH HAMMERED FINISH

1025.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing a[1 materials, labor, tools and equipment, plant and other facilities and
undertaking the proper application of Bush Hammered finish complete required as shown on the Plans and n
accordance with this Specification.
The contractor shall submit for approval samples of each applied finish 300 mm x 300 mm of different shades to the
Engineer. Approved samples shall be kept for future reference.
1025.2.1 Cement
Cement shall be ordinary gray Portland cement conforming with the specification requirement defined in Item 700,
Hydraulic Cement. One brand of Portland cement shall be used throughout the plaster mortar mix.
1025.2.2 Adobe Aggregate
Adobe aggregate shall be crushed and pulverized to an approved graded size improving its mixing ability as coarse
aggregate.
Wall surfaces to be rendered with bush hammered finish shall be scratch coated with plaster cement mortar and be
made true to plane, plumbed and squared. The scratch coat must be properly cured within seven days.
1025.3.2 Mixture of Adobe Plaster Mortar
Adobe plaster shall be a mixture of Portland cement, crushed and pulverized graded adobe stones. It shall be
uniformly mixed in the proportion by volume of one part Portland cement and two parts adobe aggregates (1:2
proportions).
1025.3.3 Application Procedure
1025.3.3.1 Before any application work is commenced all wood moulds for horizontal and vertical groove joints shall
be first established and set.
The scratch coat has to season for seven days.
1025.3.3.2 Surfaces to be applied with adobe plaster motar shall be thoroughly moistened with fog spray.
1025.3.3.3 Adobe plaster mortar shall be floated to a true and even surface. It may also be floated/troweled to a hard
fluted surface with series of grooves also known as corduroy finish.
1025.3.3.4 As soon as the plastered finish is hard enough to react hammering, the surface is textured by hammering
with an ax or hatchet leaving or exposing the natural appearance of the aggregate composition of mortar mixture.
Bush hammered finish shall be level, plumbed squared and true to a tolerance of 3 mm without 3 m without caves,
crack blisters, pits crazing, discolorations, projection or other imperfections. Plastering work shall be formed carefully
around angles, contours and cants. Special care shall be taken to prevent 'sagging and consequent dropping of
applications. There shall be no junction marks in the finish where one day work adjoins another. Where required and
as directed by the Engineer provide vertical and horizontal groove joints.
1025.3.5 Curing and Protection
Upon completion of the work all surfaces shall be cleaned with steel brush and water to removed loose particles
leaving the cleaned surfaces in its natural appearance. When cleaned surfaces dries spray a coat of water repellant.
Bush hammered finish shall be measured per area actually done in square meter completed and accepted to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
The work quantified and determined in the preceding section or as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for
at the Contract unit bid which price and payment constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools,
equipment and other incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
Pay Item Number Description Method of Measurement
2
1025 (a) Bush hammered finish
m
Fluted bush hammered 2

1025 (b)
finish m
ITEM 1026-PEBBLE WASHOUT FINISH

1026.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, labor, tools and equipment required in undertaking the proper
application of pebble, washout finish as shown on :!le Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
1026.2.1 Pebble
Pebble shall be well graded stones sized ranging from #4 to #10 rounded specie like Luna Stones, Boracay, etc.
1 026.2.2 Cement
Cement shall be Portland type conforming to Item 700, Hydraulic Cement. It can be of gray or white specie
depending on the tone or color scheme approved.
1026.2.3 Colored Cement
Colored cement shall be powder type pigmented used to obtain the desired shade and color of finish.
All pebble washout finish shall be done by men experienced and qualified to do this particular type of trade. The
Contractor shall submit at least two samples for each type of pebble washout finish to the Engineer/ Architect for
approval showing its color, texture and design patterns.
Surface to receive pebble washout finish shall be clean of all projection, dust, loose particles and foreign matters. It
shall be thoroughly wetted with clean water before application of scratch coat mortar. When surface has sufficiently
set scratch with hard broom.
1026.3.2 Mixture
Pebble washout finish mix shall consist of one part Portland cement and two parts pebble measured by volume or a
proportion equivalent to 1:2. Mixtures shall be in approved containers to ensure that the specified materials are
controlled and accurately measured. Mixtures measured by shovel or shovel counts will not be permitted. Unless
specified otherwise pebble washout mix shall be in the proportion by volume in approved mixing machines or mortar
boxes. The aggregates introduced and mixed in such a manner that the materials will be uniformly distributed
throughout the mass. A sufficient amount of water shall be added gradually and the mass further mixed until a mortar
plasticity necessary for the purpose intended is obtained. Mortar boxes, pans etc. where mixtures are mixed shall be
keep clean and free from debris or dried mortar.
1026.3.3Application
· a) Before any application, work is started the Contractor shall establish all wood mould for
vertical and horizontal groove lines after the scratch coat has seasoned for seven .days in the
case of masonry wall or concrete columns, beams, parapets, etc.
· b) In the case of finish flooring application and the like the slope of drainage .should be
properly provided and design pattern properly placed. The proposed underbed shall be done
to a level of 16 mm below the finish floor line to accommodate the pebble washout mix.
· c) The prepared surfaces to receive the pebble washout mix shall be kept damp for at least
four
· (4) hours before the application work is commenced.
· d) Pebble washout finish mix shall be applied with pressure to obtain solid adhesion to the prepared surface.
· e) The applied surface shall be firm, even and monolithic ally applied, then allowed to set initially.
· f) When the applied surface has initially set to withstand the removal of the cement paste spray evenly by spray
apparatus to washout and cement paste on the outer surface so that the pebbles are partly exposed or by means of
paint brush and water, or by means of spray washing down the cement paste leaving the pebbles partially exposed in
their natural texture appearance.
1026.3.4Workmanship
· a) Pebble washout finish shall be leveled, plumbed, squared true within a tolerance of 3
mm in 3 m without caves cracks, blisters, pits crazing, discoloration, projections, or other
imperfections.
· b) Special care shall be taken to prevent sagging and consequent drooping of applications.
· c) There shall be no invisible junction marks in the finish surface where one day work
adjoins another.
· d) Where required or directed by the Engineer/ Architect provide vertical and horizontal
groove joints.
1026.3.5Curing and Protection
· a) When the pebble washout surface has finally set the surface shall be kept wet or moist
for at least six days.
· b) After all other trade have been completed the pebbles washout finish surfaces shall be
saturated with diluted hydrochloric acid and cleaned with steel brush.
· c) Allow the clean surface to dry then apply a coat of silicon water repellant to protect the
natural physical appearance of the pebble washout finish.
Pebble washout finish shall be measured in square meters, lineal meters or part thereof for work actually completed
and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer/Architect.
The work done under this Item as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the contract unit bid which
price and payments constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals
necessary to complete this Item.
Pay Item Number
1026 (a)
Pebble washout In/m2
ITEM 1027 -CEMENT PLASTER FINISH

1027.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all cement plaster materials, labor, tools and equipment required in undertaking
cement plaster finish as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
Manufactured materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original unbroken packages or containers which are
labelled plainly with the manufacturer's name and trademark.
1027.2.1 Cement
Portland cement shall conform with the requirements as defined in Item 700, Hydraulic Cement.
1027.2.2 Hydrated Lime
Hydrated lime shall conform with the requirements as defined in item 701, Hydrated Lime.
1027.2.3 Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregates shall be clean, washed sharp river sand and free from dirt, clay, organic matter or other deleterious
substances. Sand derived from crushed gravel or stone may be used with the Engineer's approval but in no case
shall such sand be derived from stone unsuitable for use as coarse aggregates.
1027.3.1 Mixture
· a) Mortar mixture for brown coat shall be freshly prepared and uniformly mixed in the
proportion by volume of one part Portland Cement, three (3) parts sand and one fourth (1/4)
part hydrated lime.
· b) Finish coat shall be pure Portland Cement properly graded conforming to the
requirements of Item 700, Hydraulic Cement and mixed with water to approved consistency
and plasticity.
· a) After removals of formworks reinforce concrete surfaces shall be roughened to improve

adhesion of cement plaster.
· b) Surfaces to receive cement plaster shall be cleaned of all projections, dust, loose
particles, grease and bond breakers. Before any application of brown coat is commenced all
surfaces that are to be plastered shall be wetted thoroughly with clean water to produce a
uniformly moist condition.
· a) Brown coat mortar mix shall be applied with sufficient pressure starting from the lower
portion of the surface to fill the grooved and to prevent air pockets in the reinforced
concrete/masonry work and avoid mortar mix drooping. The brown coat shall be lightly
broomed/ or scratch before surface had properly set and allowed to cure.
· b) Finish coat shall not be applied until after the brown coat has seasoned for seven days
and corrective measures had been done by the Contractor on surfaces that are defective.
Just before the application of the finish coat, the brown coat surface shall be evenly
moistened with potable water. Finish coat shall be floated first to a tue and even surface, then
troweled in a manner that will force the mixture to penetrate into the brown coat. Surfaces
applied with finish coat shall then be smooth with paper in a circular motion to remove trowel
marks, checks and blemishes. All cement plaster finish shall be 10 mm thick minimum on
vertical concrete and/or masonry walls.
Wherever indicated on the Plans to be "Simulated Red Brick Finish", the Contractor shall render brick design on
plaster surface before brown coat had properly set and then allowed to dry. Cement plaster shall not be applied
directly to:
· a) Concrete or masonry surface that had been coated with bituminous compound and,
· b) Surfaces that had been painted and previously plastered.
Cement plaster finish shall be true to details and plumbed. Finish surface shall have no visible junction marks where
one (1) Day's work adjoins the other. Where directed by the Engineer or as shown on the Plans vertical and
horizontal groove joints shall be 25 mm wide and 10 mm deep.
All cement plaster finish shall be measured in square meters or part thereof for work actually completed in the
building.
The work quantified and determined as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the Contract Unit Price
which price constitutes full compensation including labor, materials, tools and equipment and incidentals necessary
to complete this Item.
Pay Item Number 1027 Unit of Measurement m

Description Cement plaster finish
(a) 2
Simulated red 2
1027 (b)
bricks.pn142 m
ITEM 1028 -SYNTHETIC ADOBE

1028.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing synthetic adobe materials, labor, tools and equipment necessary and undertaking
synthetic adobe works as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specifications.
1028.2.1 Adobe Stones
Adobe stones shall be crushed and pulverized to an approved size improving its mixing ability as aggregate. It shall
conform to the approved sample submitted showing the specie color and design.
Portland cement shall conform to the Specification requirements defined in Item 701 Hydraulic Lime. One brand of
Portland cement shall be used throughout the synthetic adobe mortar mix.
Walls to be applied with synthetic adobe shall be scratching coated with cement plaster and be made true to plane,
level, plumbed and squared. The scratch coat must be properly cured within seven days.
1028.3.2 Mixture
Synthetic adobe tool finish shall be a mixture of crushed and pulverized adobe stones and Portland cement. It shall
be uniformly mixed in the proportion by volume of one part Portland cement and two parts crushed and pulverized
adobe stones. Where approved to blend sea shell or marble chips the same shall be premixed.
The Contractor shall establish all wood mould for groove joints after the prepared surface has seasoned for seven
days. The surface shall be evenly moistened with fog spray. Synthetic adobe plaster mix shall be floated toa true and
even surface. It may also be troweled to a hard flutedsurface with series of grooves. As soon as the plastering is hard
enough, the surface is textured by means of fine hammering to produce the desired external effect.
1028.3.4 Types of Textural Tool Finish
· a) Bush hammered synthetic adobe finish

The applied adobe plaster when appropriate to react shall be finished with fine
hammering. The textured surface shall expose the natural appearance of the
aggregate composition of mix.
· · b) Flutted bush hammered finish
The applied surface of series of groove done with wood mould patterns shall
be textured by fine hammering exposing the aggregate composition to the
natural appearance.
· · c) Piqueta tool finish
The applied surface shall be textured by using an ax or hatchet leaving parallel line markings improving its textural
appearance.
Synthetic adobe finish shall be level, plumbed squared and true to a tolerance of 3 mm without caves, cracks blisters,
pits, crazing, discolorations, projections or other imperfections. Plaster work shall be formed carefully around angels,
contours and cants. Special care shall be taken to prevent sagging and consequent dropping of applications.There
shall be no junction marks in the finish where one day work adjoins another. Where required and as directed by the
Engineer provide vertical and horizontal groove joints.
Upon completion of the work and surfaces had completely set clean with water and steel brush so that loose particle
shall be removed leaving the exposed surface in its natural appearance.
Synthetic adobe tool finish shall be measured in square meters or part thereof for work actually completed and
accepted to the satisfaction of, the Engineer.
The work quantified and determined in the preceding section 1031.4 Method of Measurement shall be paid for at the
Contract unit price which price and payment constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools and
equipment and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
Payment will be made Pay under:

Unit of Measurement
ItemNumber Description
1028 (a) Bush hammered synthetic adobe finish m2
Fluted bush hammered synthetic adobe

1028 (b) m2
finish
1028 (c)
Piqueta tool finish synthetic

m2
finish
ITEM 1029 -GRANATITE WASHOUT FINISH

1029.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all granitite washout materials, labor, tools and equipment requires in undertaking
granitite washout finishing works as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
1029.2.1 Marble Granules
Granules shall be domestic marble chips, hard and well graded. Size 1 granules shall pass 6 mm mesh sieve and
retained on a 3 mm mesh sieve. Size 2 granules shall pass 9 mm mesh sieve and retained on a 6 mm mesh sieve.
1029.2.2 Pea Gravel
Pea gravel shall be clean, hard, uniformly rounded and graded to approximate size of 6 mm minimum diameter and
used for blending to acquire the approved color harmony (Pre mixed with marble granules).
1029.2.3 Cement
Portland cement (white or ordinary gray) shall conform to the Specification requirement defined in Item 700,
Hydraulic Cement.
Surface to receive granitite washout finish shall be cleaned of all projection, dust, loose particles and foreign matters.
It shall be thoroughly wetted with potable water before application of scratch coat. Plastered surface shall be
scratched before final setting of mortar mixed.
1029.3.2 Mixture
Granitite washout mixed shall be a mixture of Portland cement marble granules blended with pea gravel and Portland
cement. It shall be uniformly mixed in the proportion by volume of one part white or gray Portland cement and two
parts marble granules and one half part pea gravel.
The Contractor shall establish all wood moulds for groove lines after the scratch coat has seasoned for seven days.
The scratch coat shall be evenly moistened with fog spray before granitite washout plaster shall be troweled and
floated to a true and even surface.
1029.3.4 Texture Finishing
Finishing shall be started as soon as the granitite washout plaster surface begins to set and is semidry, spraying
evenly by a spray apparatus to washout all cement paste on the outer surface so that the aggregate are partly
exposed or by means of a paint brush and water, or sponge and water washing down the remaining cement paste
leaving the granules in their natural texture appearance.
Granitite washout finish shall be leveled, plumbed, squared and true within a tolerance of 3 mm in 3 m without caves,
cracks, blisters, pits, crazing, discolorations, projections or other imperfections. Plaster work shall be formed carefully
around angles, contours, and cants. Special care shall be taken to prevent sagging and consequent drooping of
applications. There shall be no visible junction marks in the finish where one day's work adjoins another. Where
required and as directed by the Engineer provide vertical and horizontal groove joints.
When the granitite washout finish has finally set, the surface shall be kept wet or moist for at least six days.
After curing and all other trades as completed their works the granitite washout finished surfaces shall be saturated
with potable water.
Cleaning shall be done with a steel brush. When surface dries, silicon water repellant shall be applied to protect
physical appearance of the granitite washout finish.
Granitite washout finish shall be measured in square meters, lineal meters or part thereof for work actually completed
and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The work done under Item 1027.4 as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the Contract unit price
which price and payment constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools and equipment and incidentals
Pay Item
Number
1029 (1) Granitite washout finish m2, Im
ITEM 1030 -ACCOUSTICAL CEILING

1030.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installing acoustical ceiling materials, tool, labor and equipment necessary as
shown on the Plans and Specifications.
All acoustical materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original unbroken packages or containers which are
labeled plain with manufacturer's name and trademark. All materials shall be carefully handled and delivered at the
jobsite and provided with a storage for materials or damage by water or dampness. All acoustical ceiling materials
shall be provided with non-combustible mineral fiber and have a 9. 12, 15 mm thickness and must have the following
physical properties as hereunder specified.
PROPERTY FIGURES TEST METHOD

1. Thickness
= 0.2 mm JIS A 6307
Tolerance
2. Density 320 350 kg/m2 JIS A 6307
3. Moisture Content 1.0 2.0% JIS A 6307
4. Flexural Strength 20-25 kgf/cm2 JIS A 6307
5. Thermal
0.047 kcal/mhc0 JIS A 6307
Conductivity
6. Light Reflectance LRI(87%) ASTM C 523
7. Non- Approved by the Japanese Ministry of Construction as noncombustible Class 1 under the
combustibility approval of No.1021
8. Flame Spread Class 1 (O-25) ASTM E 84
9. Flame Spread Class 25 US Federal Specs SS-s 118a

The acoustical ceiling materials to be used shall conform to the samples approved by the Director of Bureau of
Design. All acoustical works shall be done by men experienced and qualified to do this particular specialty trade.
1030.3.1 Inspection of Surfaces
The acoustical contractor shall verify and examine all surfaces covered and the conditions under which all acoustical
ceiling work is to be performed and must notify all unsatisfactory conditions and no work shall be performed unless all
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected by the Engineer.
1030.3.2 Preparation of Surfaces
Before any installation of work begins, all surfaces must be clean, dry, level and free from irregularities and tested for
adhesive bond.
1030.3.3 Installation of Acoustical Ceiling Materials
The installation of acoustical materials shall be in accordance with the detailed section and with the manufacturer's
manual instructions. Acoustical materials shall be cut as required to fit the perpendicular condition and should be
properly secured by anchorage and other accessories to complete the installation. No mechanical work shall be
exposed on the finish work. All joints around electrical outlets, pipes, and other work extending through materials
shall be sealed with caulking.
1030.3.4 Cleaning of Surfaces
The finished surfaces shall be cleaned and must be free from any spots, dirt marks and dust by the use of soft art
gum eraser. For larger areas with larger smudges, use a chemical treated new sponge rubber pad or wallpaper
cleaner. Dust shall be removed by brushing lightly with a soft brush or clean rag, or by vacuuming with soft brush
attachment.
1030.3.5 Guarantee
The materials and workmanship furnished under this Item shall be guaranteed by the acoustical contractor for a
period of one (1) year from the completion date and final inspection and accepted in writing by the Engineer. Any
defective materials or workmanship shall be replaced and corrected by the acoustical contractor.
The work commenced under this Item shall be measured the ceiling area covered in square meters (m2) or by
number of pieces.
The quantity determined shall be paid for at the Contract Unit Price which price constitute full compensation including
labor, materials, tools and equipment and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
Pay Item No. and Description
Acoustical Ceiling Panel
Unit of Measurements
Square meters / number of pieces
ITEM 1031 -ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT

1031.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, tools, labor, equipment and performing all operations for all
acoustical treatment requirement as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
All acoustical products shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of similar materials
and with a history of successful production acceptable to the Architect/Engineer.
1031.2.1 Acoustical Tile/Board/Panel
Acoustical tile/board/panel shall be manufactured of non-combustible mineral fiber having varied thickness ranging
from 9.12.15 mm etc. Color, textural and physical appearance shall be approved by the Architect/ Engineer.
1031.2.2 Sprayed-on Acoustical Material
Sprayed-on acoustical material shall be mineral fiber manufactured as acoustical treatment for structural frames and
the like.
1031.2.3 Other Materials
Other materials not specifically described but essential to complete the acoustical treatment required shall be
selected by the Contractor and subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
The Contractor shall verify and examine all surfaces to be applied with acoustical treatment and the conditions under
which acoustical treatment and the conditions under which tiles/boards/panel are to be installed and must notify all
unsatisfactory conditions to the Architect/ Engineer before any work is performed.
· a) Surfaces to be applied with sprayed-on acoustical material shall be clean dry, free from
irregularities and tested for adhesive bond.
· b) Ceiling T-runners or plywood backing as the case may be shall be properly aligned,
level, rigidly anchored, true to vertical height requirements.
· c) Partitions, wall to be rendered acoustical treatment shall be true to details properly
plumbed and rigidly anchored.
· a) Acoustical tile/board/panel shall be installed properly in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendation.
· b) Anchoring of each type shall be as indicated on the Plans or as approved by the
Architect /Engineer.
· c) Sprayed-on acoustical treatment on metal surfaces like structural frames, trusses and
bracing systems shall be applied at a rate and method of application recommended by the
manufacturer and as approved by the Architect/Engineer. Test on acoustics shall be done
prior to placement of sprayed-on acoustical treatment to determine the necessity and design
of the acoustical treatment.
1031.3.3 Cleaning of Surfaces
The finished surfaces shall be cleaned and must be free from any spots, dirt marks and dust by the use of soft art
gum eraser. For larger areas with larger smudges, use a chemical treated new sponge rubber pad or wallpaper
cleaner. Dust may be removed by brushing lightly with a soft brush or clean rag, or by vacuuming with soft brush
attachment.
1031.3.4 Guarantee
The materials and workmanship furnished under this Item shall be guaranteed by the acoustical contractor for a
period of one (1) year from the completion date and final inspection and accepted in writing by the Engineer. Any
defective materials or workmanship shall be replaced and corrected by the contractor without extra cost borne to the
owner.
The work commenced under this Item shall be measured the ceiling area tin square meter or by number of pieces.
The quantity determined in sub-section 1035.4 shall be paid for at the Contract Unit Price which price constitute full
compensation including labor, materials, tools and equipment and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
Payment will be paid under:
Pay Item
Description
Unit of Number Measurement
1031.2.1 Acoustical tile/board/ panel m2

1031.2.2 Sprayed-on acoustical material m2
ITEM 1032 -PAINTING, VARNISHING AND OTHER RELATED

WORKS
1032.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all paint materials, varnish and other related products, labor, tools, equipment
and plant required in undertaking the proper application of painting, varnishing and related works indicated on the
Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
1032.2.1 Paint Materials
All types of paint material, varnish and other related product shall be subject to random test as to material
composition by the Bureau of Research and Standard, DPWH or the National Institute of Science and Technology.
(Use the following approved and tested brand name: Boysen, Davies, Dutch Boy, Fuller 0 Brien, or any approved
equal).
1032.2.2 Tinting Colors
Tinting colors shall be first grade quality, pigment ground in alkyd resin that disperses and mixes easily with paint to
produced the color desired. Use the same brand of paint and tinting color to effect good paint body.
1032.2.3 Concrete Neutralizer
Concrete neutralizer shall be first grade quality concentrate diluted with clean water and applied as surface
conditioner of new interior and exterior walls thus improving paint adhesion and durability.
1032.2.4 Silicon Water Repellant
Silicon water repellant shall be transparent water shield especially formulated to repel rain and moisture on exterior
masonry surfaces.
1032.2.5 Patching Compound
Patching compound shall be fine powder type material like calciumine that can be mixed into putty consistency, with
oil base primers and paints to fill minor surface dents and imperfections.
1032.2.6 Varnish
Varnish shall be a homogeneous solution of resin, drying oil, drier and solvent. It shall be extremely durable clear
coating, highly resistant to wear and tear without cracking, peeling, whitening, spotting, etc. with minimum loss of
gloss for a maximum period of time.
1032.2.7 Lacquer
Lacquer shall be any type of organic coating that dries rapidly and solely by evaporation of the solvent. Typical
solvent are acetates, alcohols and ketones. Although lacquers were generally based on nitrocellulose, manufacturers
currently use, vinyl resins, plasticizers and reacted drying oils to improve adhesion and elasticity.
1032.2.8 Shellac
Shellac shall be a solution of refined lac resin in denatured alcohol.It dries by evaporation of the alcohol. The resin is
generally furnished in orange and bleached grades.
1032.2.9 Sanding Sealer
Sanding sealer shall be quick drying lacquer, formulated to provide quick dry, good holdout of succeeding coats, and
containing sanding agents such as zinc stearate to allow dry sanding of sealer.
1032.2.10 Glazing Putty
Glazing putty shall be alkyd-type product for filling minor surface unevenness.
1032.2.11 Natural Wood Paste Filler
Wood paste filler shall be quality filler for filling and sealing open grain of interior wood. It shall produce a level finish
for following coats of paint varnish/lacquer and other related products.
1032.2.12 Schedule
Exterior
· a) Plain cement plastered finish to be painted

· b) Concrete exposed aggregate and/or tool finish
· c) Ferrous metal
· d) Galvanized metal
· e) Wood painted finish
· f) Wood varnished finish
· -3 coats Acrylic base masonry paint
· -1 coat water repellant
· -1 coat primer and 2 coats enamel pain
· -1 coat zinc chromate primer and
· 2 coats portland cement paint
· -3 coats oil based paint
· -varnish water repellant
Interior
a) Plain cement plastered finish to be painted b) · -2 coats acrylic base masonry paint
Concrete exposed agreegate and/or tool finish
· -clean surface
c) Ferrous metal -1 coat primer and 2 coats enamel paint
-3 coats of 3 parts thinner 1 part lacquer

d) Woodwork sea-mist e) Woodwork varnish
· -1st coat, of one part sanding sealer to one part solvent
2nd coat of 2/3 sanding sealer to 1/3 solvent
f) Woodwork painted -3 coats of oil base paint finish 109
-1 coat oil based paint allow to dry then patch surfaces unevenness and apply
g) Ceiling boards textured finish textured paint coat

The Contractor prior to commencement of the painting, varnishing and related work shall examine the surfaces to be
applied in order not to jeopardize the quality and appearances of the painting varnishing and related works.
All surfaces shall be in proper condition to receive the finish. Woodworks shall be hand-sanded smooth and dusted
clean. All knotholes pitch pockets or sappy portions shall be sealed with natural wood filler. Nail holes, cracks or
defects shall be carefully puttied after the first coat, matching the color of paint.
Interior woodworks shall be sandpapered between coats. Cracks, holes of imperfections in plaster shall be filled with
patching compound and smoothed off to match adjoining surfaces.
Concrete and masonry surfaces shall be coated with concrete neutralizer and allowed to dry before any painting
primer coat is applied. When surface is dried apply first coating. Hairline cracks and unevenness shall be patched
and sealed with approved putty or patching compound. After all defects are corrected apply the finish coats as
specified on the Plans (color scheme approved).
Metal shall be clean, dry and free from mill scale and rust. Remove all grease and oil from surfaces. Wash unprimed
galvanized metal with etching solution and allow it to dry. Where required to prime coat surface with Red Lead Primer
same shall be approved by the Engineer.
In addition the Contractor shall undertake the following:
· 1. Voids, cracks, nick etc. will be repaired with proper patching material and finished
flushed with surrounding surfaces.
· 2. Marred or damaged shop coats on metal shall be spot primed with appropriate metal
primer.
· 3. Painting and varnishing works shall not be commenced when it is too hot or cold.
· 4. Allow appropriate ventilation during application and drying period.
· 5. All hardware will be fitted and removed or protected prior to painting and varnishing
works.
Paints when applied by brush shall become non-fluid, thick enough to lay down as adequate film of wet paint. Brush
marks shall flaw out after application of paint.
Paints made for application by roller must be similar to brushing paint. It must be nonstick when thinned to spraying
viscosity so that it will break up easily into droplets.
Paint is atomized by high pressure pumping rather than broken up by the large volume ·of air mixed with it. These
procedures change the required properties of the paint.
1032.3.3 Mixing and Thinning
At the time of application paint shall show no sign of deterioration.Paint shall be thoroughly stirred, strained and kept
at a uniform consistency during application. Paints of different manufacture shall not be mixed together. When
thinning is necessary, this may be done immediately prior to application in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions, but not in excess of 1 pint of suitable thinner per gallon of the paint.
1032.3.4 Storage
All material to be used under this Item shall be stored in a single place to be designated by the Engineer and such
place shall be kept . neat and clean at all time. Necessary precaution to avoid fire must be observed by removing oily
rags, waste, etc. at the end of daily work.
1032.3.5 Cleaning
All cloths and cotton waste which constitute fire hazards shall be placed in metal containers or destroyed at the end
of daily works. Upon completion of the work, all staging, scaffolding and paint containers shall be removed. Paint
drips, oil, or stains on adjacent surfaces shall be removed and the entire job left clean and acceptable to the
Engineer.
1032.3.6 Workmanship in General
· a) All paints shall be evenly applied. Coats shall be of proper consistency and well brushed
out so as to show a minimum of brush marks.
· b) All coats shall be thoroughly dry before the succeeding coat is applied.
· c) Where surfaces are not fully covered or cannot be satisfactorily finished in the number of
coats specified such preparatory coats and subsequent coats as may be required shall be
applied to attain the desired evenness of surface without extra cost to the owner.
· d) Where surface is not in proper condition to receive the coat the Engineer shall be notified
immediately. Work on the questioned portion(s) shall not start until clearance be proceed is
ordered by , the Engineer.
· e) Hardware, lighting fixture and other similar items shall be removed or 'protected during
the painting varnishing and related work operations and re-installed after completion of the
work.
1032.3.7 Procedure for Sea-Mist Finish
· a) Depress wood grain by steel brush and sand surface lightly.

· b) Apply sanding sealer.
· c) Apply two coats of industrial lacquer paint.
· d) Spray last coat of industrial lacquer paint mixed with sanding sealer.
· e) Apply wood paste filler thinned with turpentine or paint thinner into the wood surface.
· f) Wipe off wood paste filler immediately.
· g) Spray flat or gloss lacquer whichever is specified.
1032.3.8 Procedure for Varnish Finish
· a) Sand surface thoroughly.

· b) Putty all cracks and other wood imperfections with wood paste filler.
· c) Apply oil stain.
· d) Apply lacquer sanding sealer.
· e) Sand surface along the grain.
· f) Spray three (3) coats of clear dead flat lacquer.
· g) Polish surface coated using cloth pad.
· h) Spray gloss lacquer or flat lacquer whichever is desired or specified.
1032.3.9 Procedure for Ducco Finish
· a) Sand surface thoroughly.

· b) Apply primer surface white or gray by brush or spray.
· c) Apply lacquer spot putty in thin coat. Allow each coat for become thoroughly dry before
applying next coat.
· d) Apply primer surfaces and then allow drying in two (2) hours before applying the next
coat.
· e) Apply a coat of flat tone semi-gloss enamel as per color scheme submitted and
approved by the Engineer.
The areas of concrete, wood and metal surfaces applied with varnish, paint and other related coating materials shall
be measured in square meters as desired and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The accepted work shall be paid at the unit bid price, which price and payment constitute full compensation for
furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools and other incidental necessary to complete this Item.
Payment will made under:
2
1032 (a) Painting works
m
2
1032 (b) Varnishing
m
2
1032 (c) Sea-mist Finish
m
2
1032 (d) Ducco Finish
m
2
1032 (e) Texture Finish
m
PART D -ELECTRICAL
ITEM 1100 -CONDUITS, BOXES & FITTINGS
1100.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the furnishing and installation of the complete conduit work consisting of electrical conduits;
conduit boxes such as junction boxes, pull boxes, utility boxes, octagonal and square boxes;conduit fittings such as
couplings, locknuts and bushings and other electrical materials needed to complete the conduit roughing-in work of
this project.
All materials shall be brand new and shall be of the approved type meeting all the requirements of the Philippine
Electrical Code and bearing the Philippine Standard Agency (PSA) mark.
Conduits
Conduits shall be standard rigid steel, zinc coated or galvanized.Intermediate metal conduit may be used if shown or
specified on the approved Plans. PVC conduit if required shall be Schedule 40. Enamel coated steel conduits and
conduits with rough inner surfaces are not acceptable.
Conduit Boxes
All conduit boxes shall be Code gauge steel and galvanized. Outlet boxes shall be galvanized pressed steel of
standard make. In general, outlet boxes shall be at least 100 mm square or octagonal, 53 mm deep and 16 mm
minimum gauge.
Conduit Fittings
All conduit fittings such as locknuts and bushings shall be galvanized of standard make.
All works throughout shall be executed in the best practice in a workmanlike manner by qualified and experienced
electricians under the immediate supervision of a duly licensed Electrical Engineer.
Conduits
Conduits should be cut square with a hacksaw and reamed. Bends shall be made with the required radius. In making
bends only conduit bending apparatus will be used. The use of a pipe tee or vise for bending conduits shall not be
permitted. Conduits which have been crushed, deformed or flattened shall not be installed. No running thread shall
be allowed. Conduit runs crossing construction joints of the building shall be provided with standard expansion fittings
of the approved type.
No conduits shall be used in any system smaller than 12 mm diameter electric trade size nor shall have more than
four (4) 9O-degree bends in anyone run and where necessary, pull boxes shall be provided.
All ends of conduits which are left empty in cabinets and conduit boxes shall be plugged with lead or approved pipe
caps so as to prevent the entrance of white ants and dirt within the conduit system. Pull wires shall be inserted in the
empty ducts before they are closed with lead or pipe caps and shall be left therein for future use.
On exposed work, all pipes and outlet boxes shall be secured by means of galvanized metal clamps which shall be
held in place by means of machine screws. When running over concrete surfaces, the screws shall be held in place
by means of expansion sleeves for big pipes and rolled lead sheet for small pipes. All pipes shall be run at right
angles to and parallel with the surrounding walls. No diagonal run shall be allowed and all bends and offsets shall be
avoided as much as possible. Conduits shall be supported at 1,500 mm intervals maximum.
Conduit Boxes & Fittings
Provide conduit boxes for pulling and splicing wires and outlet boxes for installation of wiring devices.
As a rule, provide junction boxes or pull boxes in all runs greater than 30 meters in length, for horizontal runs. For
other lengths, provide boxes as required for splices or pulling. Pull boxes shall be installed in inconspicuous but
accessible locations.
Support boxes independently of conduits entering by means of bolts, red hangers or other suitable means.
Conduit boxes shall be installed plumb and securely fastened. They shall be set flush with the surface of the structure
in which they are installed where conduits are run concealed.
All convenience and wall switch outlet boxes for concealed conduit work shall be deep, rectangular flush type boxes.
Four-inch octagonal flush type boxes shall be used for all ceiling light outlets and shall be of the deep type where
three or more conduits connect to a single box. Floor mounted outlet boxes required shall be waterproof type with
flush brass floor plate and brass bell nozzle.
All boxes shall be painted with antirust red lead paint after installation.
All conduits shall be fitted with approved standard galvanized bushing and locknuts where they enter cabinets and
conduit boxes.
Junction and pull boxes of code gauge steel shall be provided as indicated or as required to facilitate the pulling of
wires and cables.
The work under this Item shall be measured either by lengths, pieces, pairs, lot and set actually placed and installed
as shown on the approved Plans.
All works performed and measured and as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the Unit Bid or
Contract Unit Price which payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools and incidentals
Pay Item
Number
(1) RSC Conduit Pipe -mm dia., with couplings lenght
(2) Locknut & Bushings pairs
(3) Condulet type pieces
(4) Conduit pipe elbow pieces
(5) Connector pieces
(6) Conduit clamp pieces
(7) PVC adapter pieces
(8) G.I Wire G.A # 14 kilos
(9) Hacksaw Blade pieces
(10) PVC Tape 19 mm dia x 18 mm rolls
(11) Rubber Tape 19 mm dia x 227g rolls
(12) PVC Solvent Cement @ 400 cc cans
(13) PVC End Ball pieces
(14) Octagonal junction boxes pieces
(15) Utility Boxes pieces
(16) Metal Pull Box pieces
(17
Square Box pieces
)
(18
Telephone Cabinet set
)
(19
Reinforced Concrete pedestal Pole lot
)
(20
Read Lead Point lot
)
(21
Wetherhead with type “F” condulet pieces
)
(22
Grounding Rod copperweld 20 mm dia x 3 m lenght
)
(23
Apitong or Approved equal creosoted wood pole pieces
)
(24
Anchor Rod-mm dia pieces
)
(25
Anchor Log-mm dia pieces
)
(26
Powerload Studs with nuts pieces
)
1100.6 General Specifications

The work to be done under this division of specifications consists of the fabrication, furnishing, delivery and
installation, complete in all details of the electrical work, at the subject premises and all work material's incidental to
the proper completion of the installation, except those portions of the work which are expressly stated to be 90ne by
other fields. All' works shall be done in accordance with the rules and regulations and with the specifications.
1100.7 Specifications on:
1. Lighting fixtures and lamp
All lighting fixtures and lamps are as specified and listed on lighting fixture schedule.
For fluorescent lamp, it shall be 40-watt rapid start cool-white.All fluorescent ballast shall be 230 volt, high power
factor, of good quality materials and approved by the Bureau of Product Standards (BPS).
2. Material Requirements
All materials to be used shall conform to the BPS specification.
3. Construction Requirements
All grounding system installation shall be executed in accordance with the approved plans.
Grounding system shall include building perimeter ground wires, ground rods, clamps, connectors, ground wells and
ground wire taps as shown in the approved design.
1100.8 Auxiliary Systems
All auxiliary systems such as telephone and intercom system, time clock system, fire alarm system and public
address/nurse's call/paging system installations shall be done in accordance with the approved design.
All materials to be used shall conform to the Bureau of Product Standards (BPS) specifications.
1100.9 Important requirement regarding supervision of the work and submission of certificate of completion.
All wiring installation herein shall be done under the direct supervision of a licensed Electrical Engineer at the
expense of the Contractor. The contractor shall submit the certificate of completion duly approved by the owner's
representative.
1100.10 Test and guarantee
Upon completion of the electrical construction work, the contractor shall provide all test equipment and personnel and
to submit written copies of all test results.
The contractor shall guarantee the electrical installation are done and in accordance with the approved plans and
specifications. The contractor shall guarantee that the electrical systems are free from' all grounds and from all
defective workmanship and materials and will remain so for a period of one year from date and acceptance of works.
Any defect shall be remedied by the Contractor at his own expense.
ITEM 1101 -WIRES AND WIRING DEVICES

1101.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the furnishing and installation of all wires and wiring devices consisting of electric wires and
cables, wall switches, convenience receptacles, heavy duty receptables and other devices shown on the approved
Plans but not mentioned in these specifications.
Wires and cables shall be of the approved type meeting all the requirements of the Philippine Electrical Code and
bearing the PSA mark. Unless specified or indicated otherwise, all power and lighting conductors shall be insulated
for 600 volts.
All wires shall be copper, soft drawn and annealed, smooth and of cylindrical form and shall be centrally located
inside the insulation.
All wiring devices shall be standard products of reputable electrical manufacturers. Wall switches shall be rated at
least 1 OA, 250 volts and shall be spring operated, flush, tumbler type. Duplex convenience receptacles shall be
rated at least 15A, 250 volts, flush, parallel slots. Single heavy duty receptacles shall be rated at least 20A, 250 volts.
3wire, flush, polarized type.
Conductors or wires shall not be drawn in conduits until after the cement piaster is dry and the conduits are
thoroughly cleaned and free from dirt and moisture. In drawing wires into conduits, sufficient slack shall be allowed to
permit easy connections for fixtures, switches, receptacles and other wiring devices without the use of additional
splices.
All conductors of convenience outlets and lighting branch circuit home runs shall be wired with a minimum of 3.5 mm
in size. Circuit home runs to panel boards shall not be smaller than 3.5 mm but all home runs to panel board more
than 30 meters shall not be smaller than 5.5 mm. No conductor shall be less than 2 mm in size.
All wires of 14mm and larger in size shall be connected to panels and apparatus by means of approved type lugs or
connectors of the solder less type, sufficiently large enough to enclose all strands of the conductors and securely
fastened. They shall not loosen under vibration or normal strain.
All joints, taps and splices on wires larger than 14 mm shall be made of suitable solder less connectors of the
approved type and size.They shall be taped with rubber and PVC tapes providing insulation not less than that of the
conductors.
No splices or joints shall be permitted in either feeder or branch conductors except within outlet boxes or accessible
junction boxes or pull boxes. All joints in branch circuit wiring shall be made mechanically and electrically secured by
approved splicing devices and taped with rubber and PVC tapes in a manner which will make their insulation as that
of the conductor.
All wall switches and receptacles shall be fitted with standard Bakelite face plate covers. Device plates for flush
mounting shall be installed with all four edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces without the use of
coiled wire or similar devices. Plaster fillings will not be permitted.Plates installed in wet locations shall be gasketed.
When more than one switch or device is indicated in a single location, gang plate shall be used.
The work under this Item shall be measured either by meters, rolls, pieces, and set, actually placed and installed as
shown on the Plans.
All work performed and measured and as provided for in this Bid of Quantities shall be paid for at the Unit Bid or
Pay Unit of
Description
ItemNumber Measurement
(1) Electric Wire meter of rolls
(2) Single pole tumblerswitch pieces
(3) Two-gang tumbler switch pieces
(4) Three-gang tumbler switch pieces
(5) Three-way tumbler switch pieces
(6) Duplex Convenience receptacles set
(7) Heavy Duty Convenience receptacles set
(8) Standard Telephone outlet bakelite cover with 9.52 center hole pieces
(9) Window type air conditioning outlet 3-prong polarized type pieces
(10) Bare copper wire meters
(11) Grounding clamps for electric wires pieces
(12) Messenger wire meters
(13) Guy wire meters

(14) Vibrating Bell set
(15) Traffic light Control Panel set
Traffic light metal enclosures complete with red and green light provided with vibrating bell
(16)
reflectors and 152 mm diameter set
ITEM 1102 -POWER LOAD CENTER, SWITCHGEAR AND

PANELBOARDS
1102.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the furnishing and installation of the power load center unit substation or low voltage
switchgear and distribution panel boards at the location shown or the approved Plans complete with transformer,
circuit breakers, cabinets and all accessories, completely wired and ready for service.
All materials shall be brand new and shall be of the approved type.It shall conform to the requirements of the
Philippine Electrical Code and shall bear the Philippine Standard Agency (PSA) mark.
Power Load Center Unit Substation
The Contractor shall furnish and install an indoor-type Power Load Center Unit Substation at the location shown on
the approved Plans if required. It shall be totally metal-enclosed, dead front and shall consist of the following
coordinated component parts:
High Voltage Primary Section:
High voltage primary incoming line section consisting of the following parts and related accessories:
· (a) One (1) Air-filled Interrupter Switch, 2-position (open-close) installed in a suitable air
filled metal enclosure and shall have sufficient interrupting capacity to carry the electrical load.
It shall be provided with key interlock with the cubicle for the power fuses to prevent access to
the fuses unless the switch is open.
· (b) Three (3)-power fuses mounted in separate compartments within the switch housing
and accessible by a hinged door.
· (c) One 1) set of high voltage potheads or 3-conductor cables or three single conductor
cables.
· (d) Lightning arresters shall be installed at the high voltage cubicle if required.
Items (a) and (b) above could be substituted with a power circuit breaker with the correct rating and capacity.
Transformer Section
The transformer section shall consist of a power transformer with ratings and capacities as shown on the plans. It
shall be oil liquid-filled non-flammable type and designed in accordance with the latest applicable standards.
The transformer shall be provided with four (4 approximately 2 1/2 % rated KVA taps on the primary winding in most
cases one (1) above and three (3) below rated primary voltage and shall be changed by means of externally gang-
operated manual tap changer only when the transformer is de-energized. Tap changing under load is acceptable if
transformer has been so designed.
The following accessories shall be provided with the transformer, namely: drain valve, sampling device, filling
connection, oil liquid level gauge, ground pad, top filter press connection, lifting lugs, diagrammatic nameplate, relief
valve, thermometer and other necessary related accessories.
The high-voltage and low-voltage bushings and transition flange shall be properly coordinated for field connection to
the incoming line section and low voltage switchboard section, respectively.
Low-Voltage Switchboard Section
The low-voltage switchboard shall be standard modular-unitized units, metal-built, dead front, and safetytype
construction and shall consist of the following:
· (a) Switchboard Housing
The housing shall be heavy gauge steel sheet, dead front type, gray enamel
finish complete with frame supports, steel bracings, steel sheet panel boards,
removable rear plates, copper bus bars, and all other necessary accessories
to insure sufficient mechanical strength and safety. It shall be provided with
grounding bolts and clamps.
· · (b) Secondary Metering Section
The secondary metering section shall consist of one (1) ammeter, AC,
indicating type; one (1) voltmeter, AC, indicating type, one (1) ammeter
transfer switch for 3-phase; one (1) voltmeter transfer switch for 3phase; and
current transformers of suitable rating and capacity.
· The above-mentioned instruments shall be installed in one compartment
above the main breaker and shall be complete with all necessary accessories
completely wired, ready for use.
· · (c) Main Circuit Breaker
The main circuit breaker shall be draw-out type, manually or electrically
operated as required with ratings and capacity as shown on the approved
Plans.
· The main breaker shall include insulated control switch if electrically
operated, manual trip button, magnetic tripping devices, adjustable time over
current protection and instantaneous short circuit trip and all necessary
accessories to insure safe and efficient operation.
· · (d) Feeder Circuit Breakers
There shall be as many feeder breakers as are shown on the single line diagram or schematic riser diagram and
schedule of loads and computations on the plans. The circuit breakers shall be draw out or molded case as required.
The circuit breakers shall each have sufficient interrupting capacity and shall be manually operated complete with trip
devices and all necessary accessories to insure safe and efficient operation. The number, ratings, capacities of the
feeder branch circuit breakers shall be as shown on the approved Plans.
Circuit breakers shall each be of the indicating type, providing "ON" -"OFF" and "TRIP" positions of the operating
handles and shall each be provided with nameplate for branch circuit designation. The circuit breaker shall be so
designed that an overload or short on one pole automatically causes all poles to open.
Low-Voltage' Switchgear (For projects requiring 'low-voltage switchgear only).
The Contractor shall furnish and install low-voltage switchgear at the location shown on the plans. It shall be metal-
clad, dead front, free standing, safety type construction and shall have copper bus bars of sufficient size, braced to
resist allowable root mean square (RMS) symmetrical short circuit stresses, and all necessary accessories.
The low-voltage switchgear shall consist of the switchgear housing, secondary metering, main breaker and feeder
branch circuitbreakers and all necessary accessories, completely wired, ready for service.
Grounding System:
All non-current carrying metallic parts like conduits, cabinets and equipment frames shall be properly grounded in
accordance with the Philippine Electrical Code, latest edition.
The size of the ground rods and ground wires shall be as shown on the approved Plans. The ground resistance shall
not be more than 5 ohms.
Panel boards and Cabinets
Panel boards shall conform to the schedule of panel boards as shown on the approved Plans with respect to supply
characteristics, rating of main lugs or main circuit breaker, number and ratings and capacities of branch circuit
breakers.
Panel boards shall consist of a factory completed dead front assembly mounted in an enclosing flush type cabinet
consisting of code gauge galvanized sheet steel box with trim and door. Each door shall be provided with catch lock
and two(2) keys. Panel boards shall be provided with -directories and shall be printed to indicate load served by each
circuit.
Panel board cabinets and trims shall be suitable for the type of mounting shown on the approved Plans. The inside
and outside of panel board cabinets and trims shall be factory painted with one rust proofing primer coat and two
finish shop coats of pearl gray enamel paint.
Main and branch circuit breakers for panel boards shall have the rating, capacity and number of poles as shown on
the approved Plans.Breakers shall be thermal magnetic type. Multiple breaker shall be of the common trip type
having a single operating handle. For 50-ampere breaker or less, it may consist of single-pole breaker permanently
assembled at the factory into a multi-pole unit.
The Contractor shall install the Power Load Center Unit Substation or Low-Voltage Switchgear and Panel boards at
the locations shown on the approved Plans.
Standard panels and cabinets shall be used and assembled on the job. All panels shall be of dead front construction
furnished with trims for flush or surface mounting as required.
The work under this Item shall be measured either by set and pieces actually placed and installed as shown on the
approved Plans.
All works performed and measured and as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the Unit Bid or
Pay Unit of
Description
ItemNumber Measurement
(1) Panel board (Circuit Breaker Type) set
(2) Panelboard (Safety Switch Type) set
Low-Voltage Switchgear (LVS) complete with metering devices and

(3) set
accessories
(4) Power Fuses pieces
(5) Lightning Arresters pieces
(6) Air Break Switch set
(7) Enclosed ACB NEMA Type I set
(8) Enclosed ACB NEMA Type 3R set
(9) Automatic Transfer Switch set
(10) Manual Transfer Switch without fuses pieces
(11) Motor Controller set
PART E -MECHANICAL
ITEM 1200 -AIR CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
1200.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and installation of air conditioning, refrigeration and ventilation systems, inclusive
of necessary electrical connections, ductworks, grilles, pipes and condensate drains and all other necessary
accessories, ready for service in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
The types, sizes, capacities, quantities and power characteristics of the compressor, evaporator, condenser chilled
water pump and condenser water pump shall be as specified or as shown on the Plans.
1200.2.1 Refrigerant Pipes
Refrigerant pipes shall be copper tubing, type Lor K or black steel pipe, Schedule 40 lor size of 100 mm diameter and
smaller. Pipes over 100 mm shall be black steel pipe Schedule 40. Black steel pipe shall be standard seamless, lap-
welded, or electric resistant welded for size 50 mm diameter and larger, screw type for size 38 mm diameter and
smaller, fittings for copper tubing shall be cast bronze fitting designed expressly for brazing.
1200.2.2 Pipes for Cooling Water
Chilled and condenser cooling water pipes shall be black steel pipe, Schedule 40. Pipes and fittings for size 50 mm
diameter and smaller shall be screwed type. Pipes and fittings for size 62 mm diameter and larger shall be welded or
flanged type.
1200.2.3 Pipe Insulations
Insulations shall be preformed fiberglass or its equivalent.
The insulating materials shall be covered with 100 mm x .13 mm thick polyethylene film which shall be overlapped
not less than 50 mm. Pipe insulations shall be adequately protected at point of support by means of ' suitable metal
shield to avoid damage from compression. Insulated pipes, valves and fittings located outdoors shall be provided with
metal jackets.
1200.2.4 Ductworks
Ducts shall be galvanized sheet steer' of not less than the following gages:
· 1. No. 26 for 300 mm wide and smaller

· 2. No. 24 for 350 mm to 750 mm wide
· 5. No. 18 for 2275 mm to 2500 mm or larger
· 6. For aluminum sheets use one gage higher.
Joints and stiffeners of ducts using slip joints shall be as follows:
· a. 300 mm wide and smaller, without brasing

· b. 325 mm to 750 mm wide, brace with 25 mm x 25 mm x 3 mm steel angles
· c. 775 mm to 1500 mm, brace with 31 mm x 31 mm x 3 mm steel angles
· d. 1525 mm up, brace with 38 mm x 38 mm x 3 mm steel angles
Stiffeners shall be located not more than 1200 mm from each joint.
1200.2.5 Ductwork insulation
The application insulation materials shall be rigid board made of styropor or equivalent 25 mm thick for ground and
top floor, 13 mm thick for intermediate floor.
Galvanized metal bands for ducts shall be secure and spaced 300 mm minimum center to center and corners shall
be protected with galvanized metal angles.
1200.2.6 Diffusers
The type, shape, capacity, size and location shall be as shown in the Plans.
Diffusers shall be complete with frame and gasket, equalizing deflector and volume control as indicated or specified
and shall have factory-applied prime coat of paint.
Samples of supply and return air diffusers shall be submitted for approval before mass fabrication and installation.
1200.2.7 Dampers
Dampers shall be of same materials as duct, at least one gage heavier and shall have accessible location, complete
with locking device for adjusting and locking damper in position.
Where necessary, splitters, butterflies and louvers damper deflecting vanes for control of air volume and direction
and for balancing the system shall be provided whether or not they are indicated on the plans.
1200.2.8 Fire Damper
Main duct shall be provided with proper fire dampers of the fusible link actuated type. Access door shall be provided
in ductwork for renewal of fusible link and to reset damper.
1200.2.9 Equivalent Foundation
Foundation shall be provided and shall conform to the recommendation of the manufacturer of the equipment.
Equipment shall be leveled on foundation by means of jacks or steel wedges. All spaces between equipment bases
and concrete foundation shall be filled with cement mortar.
1200.2.10 Electrical Works
Power supply shall be provided by the Contractor at the pull box installed inside the machine room and shall furnish
and install the main circuit breaker and starter with suitable ratings and capacities, conduits, wirings, fittings, devices
and all other equipment and electrical connections needed to complete the electrical installation of the system. All
electrical works shall comply with the latest edition of the Philippine Electrical Code, with the applicable ordinance of
the local government and all the rules and requirements of the local power company.
The air conditioning system shall be entirely automatic in operation and shall not require the presence of an attendant
except for periodic inspection for lubrication. All equipment and materials shall be inspected upon delivery and shall
be tested after installation. Pipings shall not be buried, concealed, or insulated until it has been inspected, tested and
approved. Walls, floors and other parts of the building and equipment damaged by contractor in the prosecution of
the work shall be replaced as shown on the Plans.
1200.3.1 Operating Tests
Refrigerating equipment shall be tested for 8-hours per day for three consecutive days or longer when so directed,
under the supervisions of manufacturers qualified and authorized representative, who will make necessary
adjustments and instruct designated plant operating personnel for each operation and maintenance of refrigerating
equipment and controls.
Operating test of complete air conditioning system shall be 6-hours minimum for each system. Tests of air flow,
temperature and humidity shall be made to demonstrate that each complies with the requirements of the Plans and
Specifications.
1200.3.2 Guarantee and Service
All equipment, materials and workmanship shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance
at any time within the period of guarantee and upon notification, the contractor shall repair and rectify the
deficiencies, including replacement of parts or entire units.
1200.3.3 Miscellaneous
The owner shall be provided with three (3) bound copies “AS BUILT” diagrams, shop drawings, part lists, serial
number and inventory of equipment including manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals.
All standard tools and equipment shall be furnished for proper and regular maintenance of installed equipment.
The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, piece, length , square metre actually placed and installed
as shown on the Plans.
Compressor, condenser and evaporator shall be measured by set, grilles, diffusers and valve by piece, pipe by
length, duct and insulation by square metre.
All work performed and measured and as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the Unit Bid or
Pay
Item
(a) Compressor, Condenser and Evaporator set
(b) Diffuser, grilles and Valves piece
(c) Pipes length
(d) Ducts and Insulation square meter
(e) Pipe Insulation meter
ITEM 1201 – WATER PUMPING SYSTEM

1201.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and installation of water pumping system, inclusive of all pipings and pipe fitting
connections, valves, controls, electrical wirings, tanks and all accessories ready for service in accordance with the
approved Plans and Specifications.
1201.2.1 Water Pump
The type, size, capacity, location, quantity and power characteristics shall be as specified or as shown on the Plans.
1201.2.2 Overhead Tank
The tank shall be provided with manhole, cover, drain pipes, distribution pipe outlet, overflow pipes and air vent.
Suitable float switch or electrode shall be provided in the tank to stop and start the operation of the pump.
1201.2.3 Pneumatic Tank
Tank shall be designed for twice the maximum total dynamic pressure required and shall have the following
accessories.
· a) A suitable pressure switch to stop pump if pressure required is attained.

· b) Air volume control device to maintain correct air volume inside the tank.
· c) Pressure relief valve should be installed on top of the tank.
· d) Electrode to be connected in the motor pump control to control the water level.
· e) Air compressor shall be provided for tank of 3,785 liters to maintain air pressure inside
the tank.
1201.2.4 Air Compressor
The air compressor shall be electric motor driven with sufficient capacity. The compressor shall be V-belt driven and
both motor and compressor shall have V-sheaves on their flywheels. The compressor and motor shall be mounted on
a base made of structural steel with anchor clips drilled to permit securing to a foundation.
1201.2.5 Pipes and Fittings
All pipes and fittings shall be G.I. pipe schedule 40.
All pipings 100 mm and larger shall be welded or flanged while smaller sizes shall be screwed.
1201.2.6 Valves
A gate valve followed by a check valve shall be placed between discharge of pump and tank to prevent back flow of
water when pump stops.
1201.2.7 Foundation
Refer to sub-section 1200.2.9 – Air Conditioning System
Refer to sub-section 1200.2.10 – Air Conditioning System
Exposed pipings shall be provided with concrete saddle or steel clamps or hangers to secure them firmly to the
building structures.
Pipe threads shall be lubricated by white lead, red lead, teflon or other approved lubrication before tightening.
Piping supports shall be placed at 3 m interval or less.
1201.3.1 Test
Appropriate test shall be done to demonstrate that the system complies with the requirements of the Plans and
Specifications.
Refer to sub-section 1200.3.2 – Air Conditioning System.
Refer to sub-section 1200.3.3 – Air conditioning System
The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, length and piece actually placed and installed as indicated
on the Plans. Equipment shall be measured by set, pipes by length, valves and fittings by piece.
All work performed and measured and as provided for in this Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the Unit Bid or
Item Description Unit of Measurement
Pump and Water

(a) set
Tank
(b) Air Compressor set
(c) Pipe length
(d) Valves and Fittings piece
ITEM 1202 – AUTOMATIC WATER SPRINKLER SYSTEM

1202.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installation of Automatic Water sprinkler System, inclusive of all pipings and
pipe fittings connections, valves, controls, electrical wiring connection and all other accessories ready for service in
accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
1202.2.1 Fire Pump
The type, size, capacity and quantity and power characteristics shall be specified or as shown on the plans.
The fire pump shall be diesel engine driven and capable of delivering a minimum of residual pressure of 103 kPa at
the top-most and remotest sprinkler. The pump unit shall be supplied with relief valve, gate valve, suction gauge and
discharge, pressure gauge.
The diesel engine shall be designed specifically intended for an automatic water sprinkler protection system. A drop
in system pressure due to the operation of one sprinkler pressure shall be triggered a series of automatic operations
that will result in the instantaneous operation of the engine to drive the fire pump with the aid of a battery automatic
controller. The required accessories are: tachnometer, oil pressure gauge, temperature gauge and control panel. A
diesel fuel day tank shall be provided to supply the engine for a minimum of two (2) hours running time.
A fuel storage tank shall be asphalt coated with necessary pipings and fittings for connection.
1202.2.2 Jockey Pump
Jockey pump shall be electric motor driven, 220V, 3-phase, 60 hertz, power connection. The capacity to be supplied
shall not be less than that indicated on the Plans.
1202.2.3 Sprinkler Head
· a) Type-spray unit, pendant and upright unit

· b) Flow capacity, 83 LPM per head
· c) Pressure rating
· 1) Residual pressure – 103 kPa minimum
· 2) Maximum pressure – 1035 kPa
· d) Temperature rating – fusing at 57.5 C to 74 C
· e) Finish – chrome – pendant – chrome or brass upright
· f) Pipe Thread – 13mm nominal
· g) Stock of extra heads and tools required
· 1) Pendant and upright – 6 pcs. For 300 sprinkler, 12 pcs. for 300 to 1000 sprinkler, 24 pcs. for 1000 sprinkler
above.
· 2) Sprinkler tongs – 2 pcs.
· 3) Sprinkler wrench – 2 pcs.
1202.2.4 Alarm Check Valve and Fire Alarm System
· a) The alarm assembly shall be constructed and installed that any flow of water from the
sprinkler system equal to or greater than that from the single automatic head shall result in an
audible and visual signed in the vicinity of the building.
· b) The alarm apparatus shall be substantially supported and so located and installed that
all parts shall be readily accessible for inspection, removal and repair.
· c) The actual waterflow, through the use of a test connection, shall be employed to test the
operation of the sprinkler alarm units as a whole.
· d) An approved identification sign shall be installed near the outdoor alarm device in a
conspicuous positions.
“Sprinkler Fire Alarm” when bell rings call Fire Department and Police
1202.2.5 Alarm and Supervisory System
The alarm and supervisory system of the automatic water sprinkler shall include ythe monitoring of the following:
· a) Waterflow switch at each floor of the building.

· b) Fire pump and jockey pump running condition and power supplies.
· c) Level of water in the reservoir
· d) Control Valves
The water flow switches on each floor of the building shall be connected to the fire alarm system and annunciator in
such a manner that the operation of any sprinkler system will activate the fire alarm system, with the location of the
operating waterflow switch simultaneously indicated in the annunciator panel.
1202.2.6 Pipes and Fittings
Pipes shall be B.I. Schedule 40. Screw fittings shall be used for inside piping. Welding and torch cutting shall not be
permitted. Piping shall be painted with red enamel paint.
1202.2.7 Siamese Twin
The siamese twin shall be 64 mm x 64 mm x 102 mm, 90 C female coupling cap and joint lug.
1202.2.8 Pipe Hangers
Pipe hangers shall be steel bars, 3 mm minimum thickness, with corrosion protection.
· a) Anchorage in concrete -expansion shield should preferably be used in a horizontal

position in the sides of concrete beams.
· b) Expansion shield in vertical position. When pipes 102 mm and larger are supported
entirely by expansion shield in the vertical position, the supports shall be spaced not more
than 3 m apart.
· c) For pipe running through concrete beams use sleeves at least two (2) sizes larger than
the piping.
1202.2.9 Foundation Refer to sub-section 1200.2.9, Air Conditioning System
· 12022.10 Electrical Work Refer to sub-section 1200.2.10, Air Conditioning System

1202.3.1 Acceptance Tests
System operation and maintenance chart shall be submitted to the Owner upon completion of the Contract. This shall
include the locations of control valves and care of the new equipment.
Marked instructions and identification sign boards: These sign boards shall be made of #14 gauge B.1. sheet with
baked enamel finish paint and letter instructions are shown on the Plans. Additional sign boards as may be required
and riot specifie8 herewith shall be furnished at no extra cost.Sign boards shall be mounted on the equipment or wall
nearest the equipment for easy identification and reading. Paints shall be basically gloss fire red and white.
· A. Conduct of Tests -shall be by the Sprinkler System Contractor in the presence of an

inspector or Authority having jurisdiction.
· B. Flushing of Underground Connections -To remove foreign materials which may have
entered. the piping during installation of same as required before sprinkler piping is
connected.
· C. Hydrostatic Test·
· 1. The Pressure -All systems, including piping shall be tested hydrostatically at not less
than 1378 kPa pressure for two (2) hours, or at 344.5 kPa in excess of the maximum static
pressure when the maximum static pressure is in excess of 1033.5 kPa. .
· 2. Operating Test -All control valves shall be fully closed and opened under water pressure
to insure proper operation. Use clean, non-corrosive water.
· 3. Fire Department Connection -Piping between the check valve in the fire department inlet
pipe and the outside connection shall be tested the same as the balance of the system.
· D. Tests of Drainage Facilities -Tests of drainage facilities shall be made while the control valve is wide open. The
main drain valve shall be opened and remain open until the system pressure stabilizes.
· E. Test Certificate -Upon completion of work, inspection and tests made by the contractor's representative and
witnessed by an owner's representative, a test certificate shall be filled out and signed by both representative.
1202.3.2 Maintenance Service
· a) The contractor shall provide free of charge, maintenance seNice of the system for a
period of at least one (1) year reckoned from the date of acceptance of the work by the
Engineer.
· b) Upon completion of the work and all tests, the services of one or more qualified
engineers shall be provided by the contractor for a period of not less than five (5) working
days to instruct and train the representative of the owner in the operation and maintenance of
the fire protection system.
1202.3.3 Guarantee & Service Refer to sub-section 1200.3.2, Air Conditioning System
1202.3.4 Miscellaneous Refer to sub-section 1200.3.3, Air Conditioning System
The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, piece, length actually placed and installed as indicated on
the Plans. Fire pump and jockey pump shall be measured by set, sprinkler heads, valves and fittings by piece, pipes
by length.
1202.5 Basis of Payment All work performed and measured and as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid
for at the Unit Bid or Contract Unit Price which payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete this item.
Pay Item NumberDescriptionUnit of Measurement
a) Fire and Jockey Pumps set
b) Sprinkler llead, valves and fittings Pipes piece
c) Pipes length
ITEM 1203 -ELECTRIC ELEVATOR

1203.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installation of electric elevators. inclusive of all necessary wirings, rails,
concreting of machine room floor slabs and all other accessories ready for service in accordance with the Plans and
Specifications.
1203.2.1 Traction or Hydraulic Machine
The type, size, capacity, speed, quantity. location and power characteristics shall be as specified or as shown on the
Plans.
1203.2.2 Car Bodies and Platform
Car bodies shall be of furniture steel, smooth and not lighter than gage no. 14.
The car platform shall consist of structural steel frame with wood flooring so treated against the attack of termites.
The undersides of the platform shall be covered with sheet steel which shall be treated to prevent corrosion before
the wooden platform is laid.
The rubber tiles floor covering shall be not less than 3 mm thick, of approved design. color and quality. and shall be
laid in 1.5 mm thick asphalt.
The car shall be wired and fitted with a compact ceiling type electric combination fan' and light fixture controlled by a
flush type standard switch within the car. .
1203.2.3 Car Doors
The type of doors shall be specified on the project Specifications or as shown on the Plans.
The car doors shall be provided with electric interlock designed to prevent operation of the elevator unless all the
doors are locked in the closed position or to prevent opening of any doors when the car is not in proper position.
1203.2.4 Hoistway Entrance and Doors
All hoistway entrance shall be provided with ornamental steel furniture with furnished trimmings of such design to
match the interior of the car.
The hoistway entrar.ce shall be properly reinforced where hangers, doors control and other fittings are to be
attached.
The same electric interlock for car doors shall prevent opening of any doors when the car is not in proper position.
The type and size of the hoistway entrance and doors shall be shown on the Plans.
1203.2.5 Counterweight and Guide Rails
Counterweight shall be of cast iron made in section properly shaped for adjusting. the total weight, and fitted into
suitable guide shoes and structural steel framing. Guides for the cars and counterweights shall be planned steel,
erected plumbed, and secured to heavy steel brackets. Guides for the car shall have a section weighing not less than
19 kg/m and counterweight guides shall have a section weighing not less than 12 kg/m.
The elevator and counterweight shall be fitted with guide rail lubrication, preferably of the automatic type.
1203.2.6 Annunciator System.
An electric annunciator call system with push huttons at each entrance I on each floor shall be provided. It shall be of
the electric lamp indicating type showing "UP" and "DOWN" calls for the intermediate landing.
1203.2.7 Hall Position Indicators
Hall position indicator shall be electric multi-lighted panel type, shall be installed at each entrance on each floor.
1203.2.8 Car Position Indicator
A car position indicator shall be provided inside the car at the most convenient location and visible to all passenger in
the car.
1203.2.9 Operating Devices
The operating device shall consist of bank of buttons in the car numbered to correspond to the various floor served.
Button shall be placed at each floor landing to bring the car to the floor. by momentary pressure of the respective
button. An emergency stop button shall be provided in the car to interrupt the power supply and apply the brake arid
stop the car independently of the operating device.
1203.2.10 Controlling Devices·
The controlling device shall be held inoperative until all the car doors and hoistways doors are properly closed.
A hall time relay shall be provided to render the car inoperative from any hall button from a predetermined period of
time after the car stopped at a landing in response to a hall call. Reverse phase relay shall be mounted in the
controller conveniently loCated and easily accessible to the operator.
1203.2.11 Foundation Refer to sub-section 1200.2.9, Air Conditioning System
1203.2.12 Electrical Work Refer to sub-section 1200.2.10, Air Conditioning System
1203.3.1 Elevator Machine Room
The location of the machinery room and its principal dimension shall be as shown on the Plans.
The machinery shall be properly aligned, balanced and pinned to the base plate in order to eliminate undue
vibrations.
All foundations shall be insulated from the machine room floors and other portion of the building structure with cork
board or the equivalent to minimize the transmission of vibration and noise throughout the building structure.
12033.2 Car
An emergency exit located at the top of the car and opening outward shall be provided. It shall be not less than 406
mm in width by 635 mm in length.
1203.3.3 Capacity, Loading and Speed
The elevator shall be capable of starting, accelerating, retarding and stopping with safety and accuracy as to loading,
in either direction, with dead and live loads ranging from no load to full rated load, and to 33 1/3 overload. The
acceleration and retardation shall be done uniformly and smoothly as much as practicable to eliminate discomfort to
passenger.
The speed variation of the elevator shall not exceed 15% plus or minus with load variation ranging from no load to full
load where variation in the power supply voltage does not exceed 5% and the variation of current frequency does not
exceed 1 %.
Refer to sub-section 1200.3.2, Air Conditioning System
The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, piece, length actually placed and installed as shown on the
Plans. Traction or Hydraulic Machine and car shall be measured by set, Hoistway doors, counter weight, Guide rails,
annunciator and hall position indicators by piece, electrical wire and conduit by length.
1203.5 Basis of Payment All work performed and measured as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for
at the Unit Bid or Contract Unit Price whichpayment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools
and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
Pay Item Unit of

Description
Number Measurement
(a) Traction or Hydraulic set
Machine and car Heoistway doors, counterweights, Guide rails, annunciators, and
(b) piece
hall position indicators
(c) Electrical Wires and Conduits length
ITEM 1204 -ELECTRIC DUMBWAITER

1204.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installation of electric dumbwaiters, inclusive of all necessary wirings and
other accessories ready for service in accordance with the approved Plans and Specifications.
1204.2.1 Machines
Machines for dumbwaiter consisting of motor, brake, worm and gear drive supported by ball roller bearing shall be
assembled into one compact unit.
The type, size, capacity, speed, quantity, location and power characteristics shall be as specified or as shown on the
Plans.
1204.2.2 Car
· a) Car shall be constructed of sheet steel with reinforced angle iron frame.
· b) Metal car section shall be riveted, welded or bolted together.
· c) Cars may be provided with hinged, permanent or removable steel shelves.
1204.2.3 Controls and Signals
Push button fixtures at each landing arranged for either "Call and Send" or multi-button operation,depending upon
the number of floors served, shall be installed. Each floor shall be provided with landing board of two (2) registered
push buttons, one (1) call button and one (1) dispatch button, to enable calling and sending of the car. This push
button boar.d shall be located beside the service opening. When operating a sendingbutton, a buzzer sounds and
"Car here" lamp lighted at the receiving station to advice personnel to empty the car. The "In Use" lamp shall be
lighted and shall respond to either call or send signals.
1204.2.4 Controller
The controller shall regulate starting and stopping of dumbwaiters and shall contain protective devices designed to
prevent motor damage from possible overload or excess current.
1204.2.5 Limit Switches
Terminal limit switches which are operated automatically by car movement shall stop the dumbwaiter at the upper
and lower terminals.
1204.2.6 Door Contacts and Mechanical Locks
Door contacts and mechanical locks shall be provided on each hoistway door to prevent dumbwaiter operation
unless door is closed, and to prevent opening of doors unless car is at landing.
1204.2.7 Electrical Work
1204.3.1 Hoistway
Hoistway shall be fully enclosed for fire protection.
1204.3.2 Machine Room
Refer to sub-section 1203.3.1 Elevator Machine Room
1204.3.3 Guarantee and Service and Miscellaneous
Refer to sub-sections 1200.3.2 & 1200.3.3, Air Conditioning System
The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, piece, length actually placed and installed as indicated on
the Plans. Machine shall be measured by set, car, door and cable by piece, electric wires and conduits by length.
All work performed and measured as provided for in the Bill of Quantities sGal1 be paid for at the Unit Bid or Contract
Unit Price which payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools, and incidentals
Pay Item Number
Description
Unit of Measurement
· (a) Machine set
· (b) Car, door and cable piece
· (c) Electric wires and conduits length
ITEM 1205 -OXYGEN, NITROUS OXIDE, VACUUM AND FUEL GAS
SYSTEM
1205.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installation of oxygen, nitrous oxide, vacuum and gas, inclusive of pipes,
outlets, fittings connections, vacuum pumps and other accessories ready for service in accordance with the approved
Plans and Specifications.
1205.2.1 Oxygen Manifold
Oxygen manifold shall consist of two (2) banks of fully charged oxygen cylinders, all connected to a common header.
Each bank shall be provided with a ball type pressure check valve, pressure regulating valve and shutoff valve.
The manifold shall be equipped with alarm system which shall provide an audio-visual switchover warning signal. It
shall also include the . necessary facilities for actuating the remote combination switch-over and Hi-low line pressure
alarm panels. The Hi and Low pressure warning shall operate when the pressure in the main varies 20% above or
below normal line of 345 kPa (50 psi). The alarm control shall include one (1) mercury tube type adjustable pressure
switch for energizing the switch over alarm circuit and one (1) double mercury tube pressure switch for energizing the
Hi-low pressure alarm circuit. A single control box shall contain 220/24 volt transformer, relays for actuating all alarm
panels, an audio-visual switch over alarm panel containing "Normal" and "Reserve Supply in Use" warning lights, a
momentary switch and automatic reset to shut-off the buzzer. .
1205.2.2 Nitrous Oxide Manifold
The nitrous oxide manifold shall consist of two (2) banks of fully charged nitrous oxide cylinders, all connected to a
common header. Each bank shall be complete with pressure regulators, safety valve set at 483 kPa, all necessary
fittings, and adapters to complete the assembly, The audio-visual alarm shall include pressure switches, isolating
valve, 220/ 24 volt transformer and remote alarm panel, consisting of pilot light, buzzers, momentary switch for
silencing the buzzer and automatic reset relay.
1205.2.3Fuel Gas Manifold
Fuel Gas manifold shall consist of two (2) banks of fully charged gas cylinders, all connected to a common header.
Each cylinder connection shall be provided with a cylinder valve. The manifold control shall include two (2) shut-off
valve, automatic throwover manifold, pressure regulator and relief valve.
1205.2.4 Vacuum Pumps
Vacuum pumps shall be duplex type each with a capacity to handle the total load without loss of vacuum in the
system.
The duplex vacuum pumps shall be provided with sequence master alternator to automatically reverse the sequence
of operation from single to both units in the event that one pump can not bring the system to the desired vacuum
level in the case of heavy demand.
1205.2.5 Humidifier
The humidifier shall be of jet and bubbles type which the aspirator element injects water into stream of oxygen. The
humidifier bottles shall be pliable, heat resistant and shall be sufficiently transparent to permit the water level to be
easily seen and with usable water capacity at least 300 cc. The unit shall have integral warning whistle which
operates in conjunction with a pressure limiting valve to indicate any obstruction in the supply tubing.
1205.2.6 Vacuum Trap Bottles
Vacuum trap bottles complete with adapter connection to the vacuum outlet shall consist of a wall bracket. cap
assembly with float operated shut-off valve regulator, gauge assembly and 1.5 liters glass vacuum trap bottles for
collecting fluids. The vacuum bottles shall have an integral arm for securing the cap and bottle to the bracket. The
cap shall also have a positive sealing overflow shut-off valve fluid assembly for closing off the vacuum in the event
the collection bottles become full. The collection bottles shall have cubic centimeter graduation and imprinted
operating instructions. The vacuum regulator shall be diaphram type with regulator mechanism and gauged housed
in a simple compact case.
1205.2.7 Service Outlet
All wall outlets shall be double or triple units for the following services; oxygen, nitrous oxide and vacuum. The outlet
shall be surface mounted type with satin finish stainless steel cover plate suitable for exposed piping system. Each
service outlet shall consist of an outlet valve with outlet thread, dust cap and chain, nameplate specifying gas service.
The safety keyed coupler shall be installed to provide a gas seal when equipment is disconnected.
1205.2.8 Pipes, Valves and Fittings
All pipings shall be of seamless type "K" hard tampered copper tubing suitable for silver brazing except pipings for
gas which shall be of B. I.
pipe Schedule 40. Joints and fittings for copper tubing shall be Cast bronze designated for brazing. Screwed
connections shall be applied with thin paste of litharge ana glycerine to the external only. Shut-off valves shall be
furnished and installed as indicated in the drawings and shall be provided with boxes to avoid tampering.
1205.2.9 Equipment Foundation
Refer to Sub-section 1200.2.9, Air Conditioning System
Refer to Sub-section 1200.2.10, Air Conditioning System
1205.3.1 Pipes, Valves and Fittings
All pipings, tubings, valves and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of oil, grease or other combustible materials by
washing in hot solution of sodium carbonate or trisodium phosphate mixed in the proportion of 373 grams to 11.4 litre
of water. Scrubbing and continuous agitation of the parts shall be employed whenever necessa;y to remove all
deposits and insure complete cleaning. After washing, all materials shall be rinsed thoroughly with clean hot water.
All pipings shall.be spaced correctly for adequate support of all lines so that weight shall be on the support and not
on the joints. Horizontal pipings of 16 mm (5/8 inch) and larger shall be supported 3m (10ft.) apart. For 13 mm (1/2
inch) and smaller they shall be supported 1.52 m (5 ft.) apart. On vertical lines the support shall be one on each
storey for piping 25 mm ( one inch) and smaller, for larger piping one support for each two storey.
1205.3.2 Testing
After installation of all pipes and tubings, but prior to the installation of the service outlet, the system shall be blown
clear of moisture and foreign matters by means of water pumped nitrogen or air. After installing the device outlet the
system shall be subjected to a test pressure of 1035.5 kPa (150 psi) by means of nitrogen or air continuously for 24
hours. This test pressure shall be maintained after each joint has been thoroughly examined for leaks by means of
soapy water.
The work under this item shall be measured either by set, lengt~, piece actually placed and installed as indicated in
the Plans. Oxygen, nitrous oxide, gas manifold and duplex vacuum pump shall be measured by set, humidifier
vacuum trap bottles, outlet and valves by piece, pipes by length. .
All work performed and measured and as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the Unit Bid or
Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
a) Oxygen, Nitrous Oxide,
Gas Manifold and Duplex
Vacuum
set
pump
b) Humidifier, vacuum Trap

Bottle, outlets,
piece
valves
c) Pipes and Tubings length
ITEM 1206 -HEATING SYSTEM

1206.1 Description
This Item shall consist of fumishing and installation of Heating System, inclusive of pipes and fittings, insulation,
motor control, electrical wirings and other accessories ready for service in accordance with the approved Plans and
Specifications.
1206.2.1 Boiler
The type, size, capacity, location, quantity and power characteristics shall be as specified or as shown on the Plans.
The boiler shall be provided with the following:
· a) The combination light and heavy oil burner with regulating valve for maintaining proper
air-fuel mixture.
· b) Blower complete with motor and starter c) Rotary gear type oil pump assembly & oil
electric pre-heater.
· d) Control panel shall be made of metal drip proof cabinet with hinged cover, fully wired and
complete with switches, fuses, and safety devices.
· e) Modultrol motor to operate air valve and fuel regulating valve.
· f) Feed water pump, electric motor driven with a capacity as indicated on the Plans.
· g) Condense receiver tank
· h) Feed water pump control
1206.2.2 Pipings, Fittings and Valves
All piping materials shall be B. I. Schedule 40, except as otherwise specified. The size of the fittings, pipings, valves,
etc. shall not be less than those indicated on the drawings.
1206.2.3 Oil Transfer Pump
The pump shall be rotary gear type, with cast iron casing. All parts of the pump that will be in contact with the liquid
shall be made of hardened steel. The rotary pump shall be electric motor driven capable of transferring and pumping
heavy fuel from the surface fuel storage tank outside the building to the day tank inside the boiler room at a rated
capacity. The suction side of the pump shall be provided with strainer and foot-valve.
1206.2.4 Fuel Storage Tank
The fuel storage tank shall be steel-welded construction inclusive of piping connections, valves and fittings, pipe
connection to transfer pump, overflow pipe from day tank, vent connection, pipe drain and manhole frame. The tank
shall be painted with one coat of primer and two coats of anti-corrosive asphalt paint.
1206.2.5 Fuel Day Tank
The fuel day tank shall be made of welded steel plate and provided with hinged cover on top, supply and overflow
pipe connections, drain connection, glass column gauge and valves. The tank shall be painted with one coat of
primer and two coats of finish paints.
1206.2.7 Electrical Work
1206.3.1 Piping Connection
Piping connection to the equipment shall be capped or plugged during installation to keep dirt or foreign materials out
of the system.
All screwed joints shall be tapped with threads properly cut. The joints shall be made perfectly tight with a mixture of
graphite or oil applied with a brush to the pipe threads. All flanged joints shall be face true, packed and made
perfectly squared.
All horizontal run pipes shall be supported. Suspended pipes sheill have adjustable expansion pipe hangers with
bolted hinged loops and turn buckles or other approved devices. Pipes supported from side walls shall have
expansion hook plates or bracket supports spaced not greater than 3.00 m apart. All steam and condensate pipes
lines shall be insulated with 85 % magnesia of not less than 50 mrn thick. Insulation shall be finished with interlapping
white cotton cloth tightly wound around and painted.
1206.3.2 Testing
All stearn and condensate piping installations shall be subjectd to hydrostatic test at a pressure of not less than
1378KPa, continuously for a period of 24 hours before installation of pipe to insure that all joints are properly
connected.
The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, length, and piece actually placed and installed as indicated
on the Plans. Boiler,fuel pump, storage tank and day tank including foundation shall be measured by set, pipes by
length, valves and fittings by piece.
All work performed and measured as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the Unit Bid or Contract
Unit Price which payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools and incidentals
Item Description Unit of Measurement
a) Boilers, Fuel Pump, Storage
Tank and Fuel Day Tank including

set
foundation
b) Pipes length
c) Valves and Fittings pieces
ITEM 1207 -BOILER

1207.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the furnishing of all equipment, materials, tools and labor necessary for the completion of
the steam laundry in accordance with the approved plans, Specifications general condition of the contract.
All materials and equipment shall be brand new and shall conform with the standards or equivalent set by the
Product Standard Agency, set by the Department of Trade and Industry if such a standard has been established for
tile particular type of materials and equipment to be used.
The type, size, capacity, location, quantity and power characteristics shall be specified or inducted on the plans.
1207.2.1 Boiler
The boiler shall be constructed with the drum electrically welded throughout, with the front and rear fuel gas return
chamber and shall be solidly mounted together with auxiliaries on a common grated surface steel base to .form a
cor;nplete structure unit. The boiler shall be fully automatic in its operation. The boiler shall be provided complete with
the following:
· a) The combination light and heavy oil burner with regulating valve for maintaining proper
air-fuel mixture, primary air fan with motor, gas electric ignition system with accessories, tools
and burner accessories.
· b) Blower complete with motor and starter
· c) Rotary gear type oil pump assembly and oil electric pre-heater and steam final heater,'
corresponding accessories, such as viscosity and temperature control, regulating valve, trap
and lines.
· d) Control panel shall be made of metal drip proof cabinet with hinged cover, fully wired and
complete with switches, fuses, safety devices, with the following features:
· 1) Operating Control (Steam Pressure Operated) 2) Combination control-programming
devices ane: electric combustion control.
· 3) Air safety switch to automatically close main fuel valve and stop burner if air supply is
interrupted.
· e) Mcdultrol motor to operate air valve and fuel regulating valve, synchronized to automatically supply burner with
proper amount of air and fuel at all firing rates.
· f) Feed water pump, capacity as indicated on the plans, electric motor driven and condensate receiver tank which
shall include a low water level alarm and shut-off burner device, boiler water level regulation for feed pump, float
valve in automatic and manual operation of the feed pump.
· g) A water softener complete with dissolving tank, testing equipment for softened water monitoring and water
meter shall be provided for the feed water requirement of the boilers.
1207.2.2 Heat Exchanger
The tank shall be provided with manhole, drain and relief valve, thermometer tapping, cold water inlet arranged for
flanged connection located at bottom side near steam coil header and hot water outlet arranged for flanged
connection located at the top. The tank shall be subjected to a pressure of 1033.5 kPa. The heat exchanger shall be
fully insulated with glassfiber or other approved mineral insulation of not less than 75 mm thick. The surface of the
insulation shall be fitted with metal jacket and shall be painted the same as the boiler.
The tank shall be electrically welded throughout and provided with removal steam heating coil assembly of seamless
copper tubing with both ends of each tube expanded in a common header making each tube free to expanded and
contract independently of the others. The cover of the steam coil heads shall be provided with connection for steam
inlet and condensate outlet.
A suitable thermostatic regulating valve designed to control the temperature of the water within the hot water tank by
regulating the steam supplied to the heating coil shall be installed in the steam supply line of the hot water storage
tank.
1207.2.3 Pipings, Fittings and Valves
All piping materials shall be 8.1. Schedule 40, except as otherwise specified. The size of the fittings, pipings, valves,
etc., shall not be less than those indicated oil the drawings.
Pipings connection to the equipment shall be capped or plugged during installation to keep dirt or foreign materials
out of the system.
All screwed joints shall be tapped with threads properly cut. The joints shall be made perfectly tight with a mixture of
graphite or oil applied with a brush to the pipe threads. All flanged joints shall be face true, packed and made
perfectly squared.
All horizontal runs pipes shall be supported. Suspended pipes shall have adjustable expansion pipe hangers with
bolted hinged loops and turn buckles or other approved devices. Pipes supported from side walls shall expansion
hook plates or bracket supports spaced not greater than 3.00 m apart. All steam, condensate and hot water pipe
lines shall be insulated with 85% magnesia, perform of not less than 50mm. Insulation shall extend to cover fittings
and valves leaving only handles uninsulated. The insulation shall be finished with interlapping white cotton cloth
tightly wound around and painted.
1207.2.4 Oil Transfer Pump
The pump shall be rotary, gear type, with cast iron casing. All parts of the pump that will be in contact with the liquid
shall be made of ferrous materials. The shaft shall be made of hardened steel. The rotary pump shall be electric
motor driven capable of transferring and pumping heavy fuel from the sub-surface fuel storage tank outside the
building to the day tank inside the boiler room at a rated capacity. The suction side of the pump shall be provided with
strainer and foot-valve. A by-pass line with a pressure relief valve shall be installed between pump and discharge
gate valve. The by-pass line shall be piped back to the fuel storage tank.
1207.2.5 Fuel Storage Tank
The fuel storage tank shall be steel-welded construction inclusive of piping connections, valve and fittings, pipe
connection to transfer pump, overflow pipe from day tank, vent connection, capped drain and manhole. The tank
shall be painted with one coat of primer and two coats of anti-corrosive asphalt paint.
1207.2.6 Fuel Day Tank
Fuel day tank shall be made of steel plate and welded and provided with hinged cover on top, supply and overflow
pipe connections, drain connection, glass column gauge and valves. The tank shall be painted with one coat of
primer and two coats of finish paints.
Refer to Structural
1207.2.7 Electrical Work Refer to Electrical

1207.3.1 Testing
· a) All steam and condensate piping installation shall be subjected to hydrostatic test at a
pressure of not less than 1378 kPa, continuously for a period of 24 hours before installation of
pipe insulation to insure that all joints are properly connected.
· b) All hot water pipes shall be hydrostatistically tested of not less than 689 kPa
continuously for 24 hours before installation of pipe insulation.
Refer to 1200.3.2, Air Conditioning System
The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, length, and piece actually placed and installed as indicated
on the plans.
Equipment shall be measured by set, pipes by length, valves and fittings by piece. The complete work, as measured
in accordance with this sub-item and accepted by the engineer shall be the basis for payment.
All work performed and measured as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the Unit Bid or Contract
l,)nit-.Price which payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools and incidentals
Ite
m
(a) Steam Boilers, Air Compressor, Heat Exchanger & Fuel Pump set
(b) Pipes with insulation length
(c) Values & Fittings piece
DIVISION III -PORTS AND HARBORS
PART F -PILING
ITEM 1300 -PILING TO INCLUDE SHEET PILING
1300.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing, driving, splicing and cutting all of foundation piles in accordance with these
specifications and where shown on the plans or as designated by the Engineer.
The requirements herein are minimum. Strict compliance with these minimum requirements will not relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility for adopting whatever additional provisions may be necessary to insure the successful
completion of the work.
1300.2 Material Requirement
The kind and type of piles shall be as shown on the plans and called for in the proposal. No alternate types or kinds
of piles, except that shown on the plans shall be used. The pile shall conform to the following requirements.
1300.2.1 Untreated Timber Piles
The kind of timber used shall be as shown on the plans.
All timber piles shall be cut from the trunks of sound live trees, closegrained, solid, free from defects such as injuries.
ring shakes, large and unsound loose knots, decay, insect attacks or other defects which will materially affect its
strength. Sound knots will be permitted provided the diameter of a knot does not exceed 10 centimeters, or one-third
the diameter of the pile at the point where it occurs.
Round piles shall becut above the ground swell and shall taper from butt to tip. A line drawn from the center of the tip
to the center of the butt shall not fall outside of the cross-sectional center of the pile at any point more than 1 percent
of the length of the pile. Piles shall be cut square at the ends with its butt and tip diameters with length not less than
those called for in the specifications or in the plans.
In short bends, the distance from the center of the pile to a line stretched from the center of the pile above the bend
to the center of the pile below the bend shall not exceed 4 percent of the length of the bend or a maximum of 6A
centimeters.
Unless otherwise specified, all pilesshall be peeled removing all the rough bark and at least 80 percent of the inner
bark. Not less than 80 percent of the suriace on any circumference shall be clean wood. No strip of inner bark
remaining in the pile shall be over 2 centimeters wide and 20 centimeters long. All knots shall be trimmed close to the
body of the pile.
The pile sizes, shall conform to the dimensions shown on the following table:
Diameter (1 Meter from the butt)
Length of Pile Minimum

Minimum Tip Diameter (cm)
Maximum (cm)
(cm)
Under 12 m 30 45 20
12 to 18 m 32 45 18
Over 18 m 35 50 15
The diameter of the piles shall be measured in their peeled condition. When the pile is not exactly round, the average
of three measurements may be used. For any structure the butt diameter for the same length of pile shall be as
uniform as possible.
Square piles shall have the dimensions shown on the plans. The kind of group of the timber piles shall be specified. It
shall be understood that any question arising between the government and the contractor with regards to the
meaning of the kind of timber called for in the plans or specifications or actually furnished, the decision of the director
of Forestry, or his authorized representative shall be final and binding.
1300.2.2 Treated Timber Piles
All creosoted timber piles shall be "Apitong" (Dipterocarpus Grandiflorus) as called for on the plans and shall conform
to the corresponding requirements for untreated timber piling. The wood shall be impregnated by the "Full Cell"
process in accordance with ASTM D 1760 and AASHTO M 133, with minimum eighty (80) Pascals of creosoted
retained on the timber. The minimum penetration of the preservative into the timber shall be 2 mm. The actual
creosoting of the timber in the plants shall be subjected to inspection of the Engineer.
The creosote to be used for all timber pile shall conform approximately to the formula adopted by the American Wood
Preserving Association of the United States of America. The Contractor shall submit a certification from the
creosoting plant that the pile delivered were im;:Jregnated by the "Full Cell" process with approximately eighty (80)
Pascals of creosoted retained on the timbers and that the minimum penetration of the creosote shall not be less than
20 mm.
1300.2.3 Steel Piles
Steel piles are built-up or steel sections usually H-shape with wide flanges designed particularly for piling purposes,
and shall be of the section shown on the plans and shall conform to Item 402.2.6' of Volume II (Blue Book).
Steel piles when loaded, shall conform to the camber and sweep permitted by allowable mill tolerance. Piles that are
bent or otherwise injured will be rejected.
1300.2.7 Prestressed Concrete Piles
Prestressed concrete pile shall be constructed as shown on the plans and in accordance with Item 406, Part F of
Volume II, Blue Book. Strands for prestressing shall be as specified in the same Item including curing and stripping of
formwork.
1300.2.8 Pile Shoes
Pile shoes, when required shall be of the approved design as called for on the plans. For concrete piles, the pile
shoes shall consist of structural steel angles, and/or steel plate with a sizes and dimensions shown on the plan and
welded to mild steel reinforcement for embedment into the concrete. For tubular piles, pile shoes shall consist of
'chilled hardened" high duty cast iron of clean gray tough metal, free from sand, honeycorGb, air holes, or other
defects, or of forged steel nosing. The cast iron or forged steel nosing shall be welded to the tubular pile or pile shell.
1300.3 Construction Method
The Contractor shall submit with his tender details of his proposed pile driving equipment and methods.
1300.3.1 Equipment, Location and Site Preparation
The pile driving equipment shall include the piling frame, hammer, helmet and packing with full information of the
method of handling and pitching piles and supporting them during driving, and of the proposed driving procedure to
give penetration to the required level and of the proposed set for the working load on the pile and the method of
calculating it.
For building foundation on land, all excavations of the foundation in which the piles are to be driven as shown on the
plans shall be completed before the driving is began. After driving is completed, all loose and displaced materials
shall be removed from around the piles, leaving clean solid suriace to receive the concrete coping.
For marine works, the piles shall be driven in properly staked positions with square holes after the site have been
cleared or obstructions have had been removed or the required dredging had been completed. Driving may be
executed with a floating plant, on falsework or with the use of any existing landing structure.
1300.3.2 Length of Pile
The length of the rest of the piles to be used for the structure shall be based upon the result of the test piles
previously conducted in accordance with Item 1301 "Test Piles". The contractor and the Engineer will on the result of
the test piling, mutually determine the length of the pile to be fabricated. The length to be adopted shall however be
subject to the prior writ1en approval of the Engineer. The foregoing not withstanding, the piles may be spliced and
redriven, if the piles will not develop the required bearing power after having been driven to the penetration as
determined from the test pile and/or test load. On the other hand, piles not driven to the required penetration referred
to herein but which have developed the required bearing power may be accepted if no penetration was obtained with
the aid of proper jetting or drilling.
1300.3.3 Driving Piles
All piles shall be driven at locations previously determined on the y. site based on the plans. Any type of hammer to
be used prior to the construction shall require the Engineers approval in writing.
Gravity hammer may be used for driving timber piles. Any gravity hammer permitted shall weigh not less than one-
half of the weight of the pile to be driven but in no case less than 907 kg for pile weighing 1814 kg. or less. The fall
shall be regulated so as to avoid injury to the pile and in no case shall exceed 6 meters.
Concrete and steel piles shall be driven with a steam hammer or a diesel hammer which shall develop an energy per
blow at each full stroke of the piston of not less than 831.48 kg.m for each cubic metre of concrete.
1300.3.4 Pile Leads
Pile driver leads shall be constructed in such a manner as to afford freedom of movement of the hammer and they
can be held in position by supports or braces to insure steady position of the pile during driving,
The driving of piles with followers shall be avoided, as much as possible and may be done only under written
permission of the Engineer.
1300,3.5 Protection of Pile Heads
When the nature of the driving is such as to unduly injure the piles, the head thereof shall be protected with a proper
cap of approved design preferably consisting of rope or wooden blocks. The cap shall be provided on the head of the
pile, and should fit the base of the follower. When the area of the head of the pile is larger than that of the driving part
of the hammer, a suitable cap shall be provided to distribute the blow over the entire section of the pile and thus
minimized any tendency to shatter the pile.
Every timber pile shall be provided with a metal collar to prevent brooming, except when the head is fitted into a steel
block.
1300.3.6 Driving of Piles
Pile shall be driven with a variation of not more than 2 centimeters per metre from the vertical or from the batter
shown on the plan except that piles for trestle bents shall be so driven that the cap may be placed in its proper
location without inducing excessive stresses in the pile. :
Procedure incident to the driving of piles shall not subject them to excessive or undue abuse producing crushing or
spalling of the concrete injuries splitting, splintering or brooming of the wood, or deformation of the steel.
Manipulation of piles to lorce them into proper position considered by the Engineer to be excessive will not be
permitted. Any pile damaged by reason of internal defects, or by improper driving, or driven out of its proper location
or driven below the elevation fixed by the plans or by the Engineer shall be corrected at the contractor expense by
one of the following methods:
· a) The pile shall be withdrawn and replaced by a new and if necessary a longer pile
· b)A second pile shall be driven adjacent to the defective pile.
· c) The pile shall be spliced or built-up as otherwise provided.
No timber pile shall be spliced without specific permission of the Engineer. 11 allowed the top portion of the splice
shall have a minimum distance of 2.50 metres below the ground line or sea bed.
It is expected that all piles shall be driven to the full length shown on the plans and as determined by the test piles.
· a) If the required capacity of the piles can not be obtained, the Contractor shall without
delay report to the Engineer for indication.
· b) When it has become impossible to drive the pile before the specified depth is reached,
the Contractor shall investigate the cause and report to the Engineer and shall not cut-off the
piles without the Engineer's permission.
· c) In case piles refuse to penetrate to the specified depth, the following procedure may be
resorted to:
· 1) Jetting: Water jets may be used subject to the approval of the Engineer. This is done by
displacing soil at the pile tip by means of one or more jets discharging a proper volume of
water under sufficient pressure to allow the discharge to come up to ground surface around
the pile. Water pressure in sand should be from 276 kPa to 414 kPa and in gravel from 690
kPa to 1035 kPa. Jet pipes can usually be pushed into the ground by hand.
· Moving the pipe up and down will give a lubricating effect. It maybe necessary to put the two jets down first on one
opposite side and then on the other opposite sides. Before the desired penetration is reached, the jet shall be
removed at least one metre short of the minimum required penetration under normal driving operations.
· 2) Drilling: When it has been satisfactorily demonstrated to the Engineer that the piles cannot be driven in the
regular manner or by use of water jets undersized pilot hole maybe drilled below the pile tip to facilitate the driving.
When drilling is permitted, the pilot hole drilled shall have a diameter not more than 75% of the cross section of the
driven pile and the drilling shall continue only through the strata of hard material obstructing the driving. The
Contractor shall make every effort to provide a stable hole of uniform diameter in order to avoid losing the soil-pile
friction along the length of the pilot hole. Before the desired penetration is reached, the drill shall be removed at least
one meter short of the minimum specified penetration and the pile shall be finally set under normal driving operations.
All piles shall be driven to levels determined by the Engineer as driving of the group of piles proceed and, in addition,
all bearing piles shall have achieved the required penetration and bearing which indicate that they are capable of
carrying with factor of safety of two at least the bearing capacity indicated on the drawings.
A detailed record of driving of all piles shall be furnished by the Contractor and given to the Engineer daily and he
shall give every assistance to the Engineer tei enable him to check measurements during the progress of the work.
1300.3.7 Bearing Power of Pile
Each pile shall be driven until it develops the bearing power indicated on the plans, as determined by the following
"Engineering News" formulas
· a) For drop hammer where the weight of the ram shall not be less than one-half (1/2) the
weight of the pile:

· b) For single-acting steam hammer, where hammer is free to fall without aid of steam
pressure in cylinder:
· c) For double~acting steam hammer, where steam is acting against piston in forcing
hammer down:
K
Where:
L -safe bearing power, in kilograms; K -weight of hammer ram, in kilograms (ram is the moving' part of the steam hammer) P-Weight of pile including driving
head and follower in kilograms m -free fall of hammer, in metres c -average penetration under last six (6) blows in centimeters; a -effective area of the piston
per square centimeter; and p -steam pressure, in kilograms per square centimeters
· d) For diesel hammer, appropriate formula to be used in computing for the bearing power
shall be submitted to the office of the Engineer for approval.
In case water jets are used in connection with the driving, the bearing power shall be determined by the above
formulas from the results of driving after the jets have been withdrawn.
When driving is interrupted before final penetration is reached, or when splicing is made, the record for penetration
shall not be taken until af1er at least 30 centimeters penetration has been obtained on resumption of driving,
· 1300.3.8Inspection of Tubular Piles

At all times prior to the placing of concrete and reinforcement in the driven tubular piles the contractor shall have
available a suitable light for the inspection of each shell throughout its entire length, Any improperly driven, broken or
otherwise defective shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer, by removal and placement or the driving of
an additional pile at no extra cost to the government.
1300.3.9 Extension or Build-ups
Extension, splice or "build-ups" of piles when necessary shall be made as follows:
· a) Timber Piles -when necessary, the splice shall be made according to detail furnished by
the Engineer, Fish plates or pipe splices are allowed however it is required that the top of the
splice shall be at least 2.50 metres below the sea bed af1er driving.
· b) Structural Steel Pile -Structural steel piles shall be spliced by welding, using splice plate
when necessary.
· c) Tubular Steel Pile -Sections of tubular piles shall be joined by telescopic sections and lap
welded for full penetration or by means of butt welding of uniform sections continuous
throughout the joint.
· d) Precast Concrete Piles -Af1er the driving is completed, the concrete at the end of thepile
shall be cut away, leaving the reinforcing steel exposed for a length of 1.00 metre. The final
cut of the concrete shall be perpendicular to the axis of the pile. Reinforcement similar to that
used in the pile shall be securely fastened to the projecting steel and the necessary formwork
shall be placed, care being taken to prevent leakage along the pile. The concrete shall be of
the same quality as that used in the pile. Just prior to the placing of concrete, the top of the
pile shall be thoroughly wetted and covered with a thin coating of neat cement. The forms
shall be lef1 in place for not less than 7 days and shall then be carefully removed and the
entire exposed suriace of the pile shall be given an ordinary suriace finish.
1300.3.10 Cutting Off and Capping Piles
All piles shall be cut off square at the required elevations. Tops of foundation pile shall be embedded in the concrete
footing by at least 0.30 metres or as shown on the plans.
If capping is required,the connections shall be made according to details shown on the plans. The required
embedment of the steel shall extend into the pile cap.
1300.3.11 Protecting Heads of Piles
· a) The heads of untreated piles in footing shall be cut-square and below the lowest ground
elevation.
· b) For heads of treated piles in marine works, the cuts and abrasions, after having been
carefully trimmed, shall be coated with at least three applications of hot creosoted oil and
covered with hot asphalt or roofing pitch. Before bolts are driven all holes shall be
impregnated with hot creosote oil.
Treated piles shall be handled carefully. They shall not be dropped suddenly,outer fibers shall not be broken and
then surface shall not be bruised or penetrated by tools.
· c) When steel piles or tubular piles extended above the ground surface or water surface,
they shall be protected by two coats of epoxy coal tar. If concrete jacket is required a
minimum thickness of .15 m shall be used. These protection shall extend 1.00 m below the
water elevation on finished ground to the top of the exposed steel.
For supply, the quantities to be paid for shall be the actual number of lineal metres of pile shown on the plans or
ordered from a list approved in writing by the Engineer based on the results of the Pile driving of the test piles.
For driving, the quantities to be paid for shall be the actual number of lineal metres of piles driven and accepted
measured from the tip of the pile to the ground surface. Defective piles on piles driven outside the allowable tolerance
as to location shall not be measured for payment but shall be replaced in kind. Piles shoes, and accessories for
splicing shall not be measuredbut shall be considered already included in the measurements of lengths for the supply
and splicing which ever is the case.
The quantities of piling left in place in theaccepted structure measured as provided above shall be paid for at the
Contract unit price per linear metre for "Piling" of the particular type called for in the proposal.
Cut-offs measured as provided above shall be paid for at a unit price per linear metre base on the cost of supply.
Cutting-off shall be deemed included in the cost.
Splicing shall not be paid for, but the length of splicing shall be paid for in linear metres as required by the Engineer.
Payment for tubular piles left in place shall include the cost of the concrete core of Class A concrete including the
steel reinforcement of the said concrete core.
All the above price and payment shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment,
tools, fuel, welding if needed and other incidental expenses to complete the Item.
1300.1
Untreated Timber pile Supply linear metre
a.
b. “ Drive “
c. “ Splice “
1300.2a. Treated Timber piles, Supply linear metre
b. “ Drive “
c. “ Splice “
1300.3a. Steel Pipes Supply linear metre

b. “ Drive “
c. “ Splice “
1300.4a. Tubular Steel Piles. Supply linear metre
b. “ Drive “
c. “ Splice “
1300.5a. Concrete Piles, Supply linear metre
b. “ Drive “
c. “ Splice “
1300.6a. Prestressed Conc. Piles, Supply linear metre
b. “ Drive “
c. “ Splice “
ITEM 1301 -TEST PILE

1·301.1 Description
This item shall consist of the furnishing, driving, including splicing or cutting off of test piles or piles in accordance
with these specification at locations shown on the plans or as designated by the Engineer.
The kind and type of pile or piles shall be as shown on the plans and shall be of the same kind and type as the rest of
the piles of the same structure. These pile shall be of greater length or two metres longer that the length assumed in
the design in order to provide for any variation in soil conditions that will require deeper penetration. The piles shall
conform to the reqUirements specified for each kind and types of pile unoer clause 1300.2 "Material Requirement" of
Item 1300 "Piling Work".
1301.3 Construction Method
The contractor shall have submitted with his tender, details of his proposed pil~ driving equipment and methods for
driving the test pile or piles. Driving test pile shall be performed with the same type of pile driver to be used in the
permanent works. The procedure shall be as described in clause 1300.3 "Construction Methods" of Item 1300 "Piling
Work". The contractor shall fabricate the test pile or piles to the specified length by the Engineer and shall be driven
in the position shown on the Plans or selected by the Engineer. such that it shall become an integral pan of the
structure.
The contractor shall furnish the Engineer with detailed record of the driving of the test pile throughout the full depth of
driving and after attaining the required penetration, driving shall be continued until refusal or until the Engineer directs
that it shall stop. Driving beyond the point at which the required penetration is obtained may be called for to
demonstrate that driving resistance continue to increase.
When refusal is attained, without the required penetration, while the butt of the pile is still above the required
elevation, jetting or drilling shall be resorted to as prescribed in Item 1300, "Piling Works". If found necessary, this
pile shall be spliced and re-driven until the bearing power attained is to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Test piles, whether or not utilized as foundation pile in the structure will be measured in linear meter shown on the
plans or as ordered in writing by the Engineer. Splicing or build-up shall be paid for at the unit price bid under Item
1300 "Piling Works". Cut-off to the required elevation are already included in the units of quantity measurement.
Test piles whether driven or not to the required penetration and bearing, including jetting or drilling if necessary shall
be paid in linear meter and size specified, driven and accepted. Cutoff are included except splicing which shall be
paid at the contract unit price for splicing for the kind and type of piling under Item 1300 "Piling Works". This payment
shall include that cost of materials, labor, equipment, tools, fuel, cutting and accessories needed to' complete the
item.
Pay Item
No.
Untreated timber
1301 (a) _____________________Linear metre
test pile butt diameter Length
1301 (b) Length _____________________Linear metre

Treated timber test pile butt diameter
1301 (c) Steel test piles size
Length _____ ________________Linear metre
1301 (d) Concrete Test pile
Length _____________________Linear metre
1301 (e) Tubular test pile size Length _____________________Linear metre
PART G -PROTECTIVE WORKS AND ACCESSORIES

ITEM 1400 -MOORING FIXTURES
1400.1 Description
This item shall consist of the furnishing, installing and painting of all types of mooring fixtures at locations as shown
on the plans and required by this specification.
1400.2 Materials
The materials shall be tough gray cast iron and casting shall conform to the details shown on the plans and shall be
true to pattern. The finished product shall be out of wind, free from flood and excessive shrinkage.
Fixing devices such as anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot-zinc coated-steel fabricated from steel with
minimum tensile strength of 37 kg/ mm2.
Items called for maybe the following:
· (a) Mooring Cleat -Weighing approximately 75 kilos each with two 31.75 mm diameter
standard bolts with standard 38.1 mm diameter G.I. pipe and ogee washer. Length of bolts
and G.I. pipe depends on the thickness of the concrete slab or timber dock where the fixture
is to be located.
· (b) Mooring Post -Weighing approximately 50 kilos each with 4 pieces of 31.75 mm
diameter x 60 cm swedge bolts with 7.5 cm threaded end and swedge of 12.7 mm long by
6.35 mm deep spaced @ 10 cm on centers and staggered 1/4 of the circumference from the
preceeding swedge, so that on each of the four sides of the bolt the swedge will be 40 cm
apart.
· (c) Mooring Bitt -Weighing approximately 405 kilos with four 38.1 mm diameter swedge
bolts by 90 cm long. The swedge anchor bolt shall be threaded for a length of 15 cm at one
end. The swedge on the bolt shall be 19 mm long by 9.5 mm deep space @ 15 cm on centers
starting 7.5 cm from the end of the threaded portion, and staggered around the bolt at a
distance of 1/4 of the circumference from preceeding swedge so that on each of the lour sides
of the bolt the swedge will be 60 cm apart.
· (d) Mooring Bollard -Weighing approximately 930 kilos with four 50.8 mm diameter x 1.30
m long swedge bolts, threaded 15 cm at one end. The swedge on the bolts shall be 19 mm
long by 9.5 mm deep spaced every 15 cm on centers starting 15 cm from the threaded
portion and staggered at 1/4 the circumference from the preceeding swedge so that on each
of the four sides of the bolt the swedges will be 60 cm apart.
Mooring fixtures shall be placed as per plan.
For mooring cleat, tile pipe with length equal to the thickness of the slab shall be embedded into the concrete at
location indicated on the plans. For timber decks, holes larger than the bolt shall be drilled. The head of the bolts
shall fit the socket on the mooring fixtures and the ogee washer shall be placed at the bottom before placing the nut.
For mooring post installation on concrete, the swedge bolt, fixed on a template may be embedded in the new
concrete. For installation on timber decks, bolts with ogee washer shall be used.
For mooring bitt or bollard, cored holes 88.9 mm diameter shall be provided in the concrete for the achor bolts as
called for on the plans.The bolts shall be carefully centered and granted in the holes, extending 9.5 mm above the
top of the cast iron based in final position, by the aid of a template made to conform in each case to the base of the
particular mooring bitt/bollard to be placed.Prior to placing the mooring fixtures, the concrete bed shall be roughened
and the exposed threaded end of bolts shall be scrubbed with gasoline and fluxed with muriatic acid, which shall then
be neutralized with hot water and soda solution. The inside of the bolt holes in the base of the mooring bitt/bollard
shall be cleaned in the same manner. The mooring bitt/bollard shall then be placed in position plumb and at precise
spacing over the bolts on a layer of stiff one to two (1 :2) cement mortar 6.5 mm in thickness. After this mortar bed
has set any mortar forced up into the bolt holes shall be carefully removed and the hol~ threads again cleaned with
cotton waste, dampened with acid and neutralized as above described. The threads and holes shall then be
protected until ready for zincing.
Zinc shall be applied to the bolt holes of the bitt/bollard in the following manner: A dam of clay 8.9 ems in diameter
shall be built on the base around each bolt. Molten zinc shall then be prepared and the bolt and hole shall then be
heated with a blow torch to prevent the zinc from hardening prematurely. The molten zinc shall then be poured in one
continuous operation for each bolt head, so as to cover the top of the bolt to a thickness of about 6.5 mm. After the
zinc has hardened, the holes shall be smoothly rounded off to a quarter circle.
For replacement only of damaged mooring bitt/bollard, the zinc shall be molten by heating with blow torch and
removed the remaining portion of the mooring fixtures shall be lifted from the bolts and concrete bedding. The old
concrete bedding shall be removed and the above procedure for installation of new mooring fixture shall be followed.
Painting-The surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with two coats of coled applied chip resistant tar with
bitumen. Bolt recesses if any are to be filled up with an approved mastic sealing compound.
1400.4 Method of Measurement The number of sets of mooring fixtures (cleats, post, bitt and bollard) supplied,
installed, painted and accepted shall be the basis for measurement.
1400.5 Basis of payment The number of sets of mooring fixtures (cleats, post, bitt and ballard) determined as
provided above at the contract unit price for new fixtures which include the accessories.
For replacement, the number of mooring fixtures reconstructed shall be determined and paid for at the contract unit
prices for supply of new fixtures without accessories. Such prices and payment shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing and placing all materials, for turning over to the Engineer all waste or damages fixtures and for all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the item.
1400.1 (a) Cleat
· (b) Post w/ accessories w/ accessories w/ accessories w/ accessories each set each set each set each

· (c) Bitt (Replacement) set each
· (d) Bollard 1400.2 (a)

Cleat
(b) Post (Replacement) each
(c) Bitt (Replacement) each
(d)
(Replacement) each
Bollard
ITEM 1401 -TIMBER WALING

1401.1 Description
This item shall consist of the furnishing, fabricating and installing of timber waling, as shown on the plans, of Yacal or
Ipil placed and fixed by . bolts on the edges of landings for the purpose of preventing the vessels or ships from
getting in direct contact with the structure.
1401.2 Materials
Timber waling shall be yacal or ipil, thoroughly seasoned or dried, sound, straight, free of splits shakes, decays and
knots and other defects.
Walings shall be sawn square and true to dimensions shown on the plans.
All bolts, nuts and washers shall be of galvanized steel.
Yacal or Ipil waling shall be placed along the edge of the wharf or pier as shown on the plans and secured in placed
by means of one 25.4 mm ¢ bolt set in 31.75 mm ¢ galvanized iron pipe embedded in the concrete and spaced as
shown on the plans. The nuts and ogee washers for the bolts shall be countersunk in the timber so that no portion of
the bolt or nut shall be within 25 mm of the outer surface of the timber, and the holes shall be placed with hard
asphalt. Likewise, the bolt heads,with standard cut washers, shall be countersunk in the concrete curb, and the holes
placed with hard asphalt of the same grade. The timber waling shall be lap-joined. The centerline of the bolts
attaching the wall to thecurb. All timber waling shall be painted with two coats of hot tar, the second coat to be
applied immediately before contact is made with the concrete.
The quantity of walings to be paid for shall be the length in linear meters of timber walings supplied, fabricated,
installed, painted and accepted in the final work.
1401.5 Basis of payment
The total length of the walings in linear meters as determined above shall be paid for at the unit contract price in the
proposal. The unit price shall be considered to include all materials, fabricating, installation and painting and all other
incidental work.
1401.1 Timber Waling Linear meter

ITEM 1402 -FENDER CLUSTERS AND DOLPHINS
1402.1 Description
This item shall consist of the furnishing, driving, cutting off and bending of piles in clusters, provided with rubbing
timber or rubber dock fenders in accordance with these specifications and where shown on the plans or as
designated by the Engineer.
The requirements herein are minimum, strict compliance with these minimum requirements will not relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility for adopting whatever additional provisions maybe necessary to ensure the
successful completion of the work.
The kind andtype of piles shall be as shown on the plans and called for in the proposal. Pilings maybe either
Creosoted Apitong, Reinforced Concrete, Steel or Tubular Piles and shall be in accordance with Section 1300.2
Materials of Item 1300 Piling Works.
For timber piles; binding shall be galvanized steel wire cables with galvanized staples and gage 24 G.1. sheet caps.
For concrete piles, reinforced concrete capping shall be used as binder.
For tubular piles, galvanized structural shapes or angles shall be used for framing and welded to the tubular piles.
For rubbing timber used Yacal or Ipil, 250 mm x 250 mm, secured by Galvanized bolts and galvanized lag screws.
All Rubber Dock Fenders shall be in accordance with Item 1403 Rubber Dock Fenders.
The Concrete and Tubular Fender Piles (Rigid Type) should be driven to a penetration sufficient to develop the
required compression or tension in the piles. Piles may be vertical or with slope as shown on the plans.
For Timber piles (flexible type), the binding shall be as follows:
3-pile -5 turns of 16 mm ¢ galvanized steel wire

cluster cable -all pile batter -one rubbing timber secured by 20 mm₵ bolts and 20 mm₵ x 250 mm lag screws spaced @ 0.70 O.C.
-5 turns of 16 mm ₵ galvanized steel wire cable -two piles vertical, 2 piles batter -2 rubbing timber
4-pile secured by 20 mm ₵
cluster
bolts and 20 mm ₵x 250 mm lag screws spaced at 0.70 O.C.
5-pile -5 turns of 20 mm ₵ galvanized steel wire cable -two piles vertical, 3 piles batter
cluster
-2 rubbing timber secured by 20 mm ₵ bolts and 20 mm ₵ x 250 mm lag screws spaced at 0.70 O.C.
-8 turns of 20 mm ₵ galvanized steel wire Cable

7 -pile
cluster · -3 piles vertical, 4 piles batter -2 rubbing timber secured by 20 mm ₵ bolts and 20 mm ₵ x 250 mm
lag screws spaced at 0.70 O.C.
-10 turns of 25 mm ₵ steel wire cable
9-pile
cluster · -4 piles vertical, 5 piles batter
· -3 rubbing timber secured by 20 mm ₵ bolts and 20 mm ₵ x 250 mm lag screws spaced at 0.70 O.C.
-10 turns of 25 mm ₵ galvanized steelwire cable -5 piles vertical, 7 piles batter
12-pile
cluster
· -3 rubbing timber secured by 20 mm ₵ bolts and 20 mm ₵ x 250 mm lag screws spaced at 0.70 O.C
The timber pile should be driven to a penetration below sea bed of about one third (1/3) of the respective length. This
penetration may be increased or decreased by a.bout one or two meters depending upon the nature of the material
encountered.
Balter piles slope approximately 1 :6. Bind the pile clusters with galvanized steel wire cable which should be secured
to every pile in contact with galvanized staples, ends of cables to be looped securely fastened.
Top of the pile and cables after cutiing and placing respectively shall be treated with two thick coats of hot tar, before
placing metal cap.
Paint with one coat of tar the cap after it is placed.
Fender Clusters and Dolphins shall be measured by the number of units with corresponding number of piles installed
and completed with rubbing timber or rubber dock fenders and accepted. For rigid type the actual penetration of the
pile (R.C. & Tubular steel) to the required bearing shall be determined and the increase or decrease in pile length
shall be measured by the lineal meters.
The number of sets of fender clusters or dolphins, installed, completed with the required number of rubbing timber or
rubber dock fenders, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per set with the specified number of pile per cluster,
which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for all falsework, form driving, placing and finishes and for
all materials, labor, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the item. The cost per set may be increased or
decreased depending on the result of driving of the R.C. or Tubular Steel Piles.
Pay Item No. & Name Unit of Measurement
1402.1 3 Pile /set
.2 4 Pile /set
.3 5 Pile /set
.4 7 Pile /set
.5 9 Pile /set
.6 12 Pile /set
1402.7 Concrete Dolphin

/set
· (a) Increase in length of
pile
(b) Decrease in length of pile /I.m.
.8 Tubular Steel Dolphin ./set
(a) Increase in length of pile . /set
(b) Decrease in length of pile /I.m.
ITEM 1403 -RUBBER DOCK FENDERS

1403.1 Description
This pay item shall consist of special approved type of quality of unused natural or synthetic rubber by extrussion
process.
Rubber Dock Fenders shall be extruded natural rubber strong durable, highly resistant to weather, salt water and
abrasion. These pay item shall be homogenous throughout, free from impurities, pored or weak sections, cracks, tats
bubbles and other defects detrimental to the services where they are intended.
This pay item shall be installed as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
The amount to be paid for shall be the actual number of sets of Rubber Dock Fenders installed or placed of special
quality as specified, accepted and finished.
The number of sets of Rubber Dock Fenders as stated above, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per sets
installed. The price and payment thereof shall constitute to the full compensation for installation of the rubber dock
fenders in-place, and for all labor, materials, equipment or tools and other incidentals necessary to complete this pay-
item.
Pay Item No. and Description Unit of Measurement
Inst. of Rubber Dock

sets
Fenders
ITEM 1404 -FILTER FABRIC

1404.1 -Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and placing of one or more layers of material, each so graded so as to function
as an effective filter against the adjoining layers all in accordance with this specifications and conforming to the
thickness, elevations and extent shown on the Plans for the purpose of preventing the erosion of fine materials
through adjoining coarser materials.
The materials shall conform to the specifications stated below, otherwise the Engineer shall require the contractor to
procure a more suitable materials or add materials of such a grain size to produce the required mixture before the
work is commenced. In this case the contractor shall provide the Engineer with all necessary information as to the
composition arid quality of tne materials he intends to use in the filters, as well as of the materials which will be used
adjacent to the filters.
The design .of a filter shall be in general be based on the following specification:
Hate Filter Fabric Type C50.002 or equivalent
Material: Warp -polyethylene Weft – polypropylene
Colour: Black
Mesh size: U.V. stabilized
Permeability
to water +0.06 -0.15 mm
D90: 240 um (Sieve analysis)
Tensile strength Weft -260 daN/5cm Warp -230 daN/5cm
Weight: 225g/m
Standard Width: 350 mm
Make-up: Rolled in cardboard core

The filter shall be laid in such a way that the rules governing the design can be applied to any position of the filter
layer in situ.
Filters placed on the exposed slopes of areas reclaimed with dredged material shall consisi of two layers, an inner
layer 80 em. in thickness consisting of material graded according to the attached diagram and an outer evenly
graded layer of coarser materials, 6-20 em. in grain size, making up the total filter thickness specified on the plans.
Filter materials shall be measured by the square metres of the thickness specified on the plan either in vertical or
sloping position perpendicular to the faces. Location and boundaries of the filter shall be so designated on the Plan
except work on additional areas in the original Plan which are found necessary during construction shall be
measured accordingly.
All work performed and measured as provided in the preceding section shall be paid for at· the contract unit price per
square metre for filter of the specified thickness, which price shall include furnishing of labor, equipment, tools,
materials, supplies and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement
Filter
1404 Square Metre
Material
ITEM 1405 -REINFORCING MAT

1405.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and placing reinforcing material or fabric lining as a layer on soils of low bearing
capacity to improve its overall stability without the necessity of its removal and to reduce settlement of the overlaying
structure as bulkhead or roadway as indicated in the plans and details or as directed by the Engineer.
Reinforcing material is woven from polyester yarns of high modulus of elasticity into a heavy duty fabric with an
extremely high strength at low strain. It has a good water permeability and is resistant to chemical and bacteriological
attach. Depending on the structure to be supported, the tensile strength is as specified on the plan with an specified
elongation.
The supplier shall furnish the certified manufacturers test on the material showing results of all physical test made, as
required and certified by the official authorized to bind the manufacturing company.
For coastal construction like bulkheads, breakwater and causeways, standard widths can be assembled to form a
large mat of the required width which can be easily sunk from a barge winching itself away from the structure.
Immediately after sinking, the mat is anchored by dumping stones on top of it.
For roadways construction over soft foundation reinforcing mat with the use of cranes maybe laid longitudinally.
Without special equipment the mat are laid with a small overlap at a right angle to the centerline of the roadway or
embankment. The top soil or filling is dump on top and the equipment can work on top during construction.
For high retaining walls construction with roadway reinforcing mat shall consists of horizontal layers that contain the
compacted earth fill with one side of the mat being folded back as anchor around the exposed edge. The exposed
surface shall be covered with earth and suitable vegetation or protected by acceptable means as stated on the plans.
The reinforcing mat shall be measured by the number of square metres placed on top of the foundation below the fill
materials including overlaps and folds or anchor lengths in accordance with the details shown on the plans and
accepted.
The reinforcing mat measured as provided above shall be paid at the contract unifprice per square metre of mat
which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing the filter fabric and all labor,
equipment, tools, additional material, including the necessary superintendence and equipment during and up to the
completion of dredging operations and all other incidental necessary to complete the item as placed and accepted.
Pay Item No. and Description Unit of Measurement
Reinforcing
1405 Square Metre
Materials
ITEM 1406 -DEFLECTOR WALL, BULKHEAD CURBS, AND STAIR

LANDING
1406.1 Description
This item consists of concrete Deflector Walls, Concrete Bulkhead Curbs,and Concrete Stair Landings in accordance
with the approved Plans and Specifications.
Concrete used in this item shall conform with the specifications for Class A concrete. Reinforcing steel shall conform
with the requirements of Item 404, of Volume II. "Reinforcing Steel".
Deflector Wall, Bulkhead Curbs,and Stair Landing shall include all works constructed on top of the rock bulkheads.
In no case shall these structures be placed on top of the bulkheads unless a minimum period of one year had
elapsed from the completion of the bulkheads or the bulkheads has sufficiently settled.
The line, elevation and form of the Deflector Wall, Bulkhead Curbs, and Stair Landings shall be true to line or as
shown on the Plans. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, the top shall be level and faces shall be vertical except
the curve portion, if any. Special care shall be exercised to smooth and tightfitting forms which can be held rigidly to
line and grade and removed without injury to the concrete. Forms shall be of board, combination of G.1. sheets and
board or boards lined with suitable materials which will meet with the approval of the Engineer. All corners of the
finished work shall be true, sharp and clean-cut and shall be free from cracks, spalls or other defects.
Concrete shall be mixed, placed and finished in accordance with the specifications for Item 405,"Structural
Concrete".
The quantity of Deflector Wall and Bulkhead curbs shall be measured in lineal metres in its final position of the
specified cross section and reinforcement as shown on the plans.
The quantity of Stair Landing shall be measured in linear meters of complete structures including reinforcing bars
constructed in its final location as per plans.
Deflector Wall, Bulkhead Curbs and Stair Landing measured as provided above shall be paid at the contract unit
price per lineal metre of structure placed or at the contract cost per unit, which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing labor, equipment, tools and materials and constructing complete as per plan and
specification and accepted.
Pay Item No. & Description Unit of Measurement
1406(1 ) Deflector Wall Lineal metre
1406(2) Bulkhead Curbs Lineal metre
1406(3) Stair Landing Lineal meter
PART H -BULKHEADS
ITEM 1500 -SAND MATTRESS
1500.1 Description
This Item shall consist of sand or gravel fill or backfill material furnished and placed as required on top of existing soft
seabed material or to replace material encountered and found unsuitable for foundation of bulkheads or breakwater
and shall be constructed in accordance with these Specifications and where shown on the Plans or as directed by the
Engineer in writing.
Sand mattress shall be dredged non-cohesive material of such quantity that the angle of internal friction will be at
least 22° in place.
1500.3 Construction Methods
After the unsuitable material has been excavated and removed as required by the Engineer or if no excavation is
required, the sand mattress shall be placed and build-up to required elevation.
Excavated surfaces for sand mattress should be backfilled at once to prevent sliding of soft materials of the seabed
and filling up the area.
These material shall be developed at the site of the proposed mattress, the first dumping shall be right on the existing
excavation if any or on the materials previously dumped or placed. The process to continue until the mattress has
attained the required elevation and shape shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. An allowance of about
0.60 metres for possible settlement of the mattress. has been assumed in the Plans.
The side slope as shown on the Plans ,shall be maintained as close as possible.
The contractor shall take all necessary care in dumping the materials for the mattress to avoid losses thereof by
wave action and current.
Any sand mattress material that is deposited at places other than those designated or approved by the Engineer will
not be paid for.
The volume to be paid for shall be the number of cubic metres, measured in final position, of the special material
actually furnished and placed as specified and directed completed in the place and accepted and as determined by
computing the volume of material by the cross section average end area method based on the survey taken prior to
filling after dredging, if any and the survey as soon as practicable after the filling.
The volume measured as provided above shall be paid for the contract unit price per' cubic metre for "Sand Mattress"
which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, hauling, and depositing the material, and
for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the item.
Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement
1500 Sand Mattress cubic metre
ITEM 1501 -ROCKWORKS

1501.1 Description
This Item shall consist of quarried rocks, bulkheads or breakwaters constructed at the locations indicated, in
accordance with these specifications and in conformity with lines, elevations, slopes, cross section and dimensions
shown on the plan or as required by the Engineer.
1501.2 Materials
1501.2.1 Rocks
· a. Quality and Shapes of Rocks. Unless otherwise specifically stated, all rocks to be used
shall be hard, dUrable, and not likely to disintegrate in sea water. Class I & II rocks must
weigh not less than 1,900 kilogram per cubic metre solid (specific gravity -1.9) or
approximately 19.05 kilo NeW10n (kN) per cubic meter of solid materials, while class III rocks
shall weigh not less than 1,500 kilograms per cubic metre (specific gravity -1.5) or
approximately 15.09 kilo NeW10n (kN) per cubic meter of solid materials when reasonably
dig.
Rocks with specific gravity higner than those specified above will be accepted
but no increase iil the contract price will be made on this account.
· Class I & II rocks shall be angular. Sub-angular rocks may be used subject
to the approval of the Engineer. Rounded or well rounded rocks will not be
accepted.
· · b. Sizes of Rocks
Pieces of Class I rocks shall weigh not less than 1 tonne (1000 kilograms) and above.
Class II rocks shall weigh not less than 50 kilograms (man size boulders) less than 1 tonne (1000 kilograms) Class III
rocks shpll be of any size and shapes provided that the larger piece shall weigh less than 50 kilograms and that not
more than five percent (5%) of the entire quantity thereof shall consist of pieces the least dimension of which is not
less than the size of pea gravel.
Quarry run may be considered class III rocks.
1501.2.2 Concrete Filler
The concrete filler for rocks bulkheads when required for the purpose I of preventing escape of fill material, shall be
class "B" concrete plus 10% additional cement conforming to the requirements given under Item 405, "Structure
Concrete," Volume II, of Standard Specifications for the particular class given.
1501.3 Construction Methods
1501.3.1 Methods of Placing Class I & II Rocks
The larger pieces of facing rock (Class I or II) shall first be laid carefully along the toe of the bulkhead with allowance
being made for possible settlement.
These rows of large rocks shall be extended to maintain slightly in ac'vance of the completed portion of the work. The
larger pieces of rock shall be placed on the outer slope of the bulkhead and they shall be laid so that their longest
dimension will be approximately normal to the plane of the face of the slope as indicated on the plans. The plane of
the exposed faces of the rocks shall conform approximately to the prescribed line and grades indicated on the plans,
and as stated out on the site by the Engineer.
No cutting, spoiling or coursing of the rocks will be required. The rocks shall be firmly bedded into the slopes and
against the adjoining rocks.
The works shall be done in a skillfull manner, which implies careful selection of the rocks to fit properly together so
that the finished surface shall be even and tight. When ever necessary, small pieces of filler rocks shall be wedged
firmly in between the facing rocks so that the latter shall be in the stable position. Filler rocks shall be of the kind and
type of the facing rock. Rocks shall not be out on the faces of the bulkhead by more than 0.15 metres inward or
outward.
1501.3.2 Method of Placing Class III Rock or Heating Rock.
Class III rocks may be placed simultaneously or before placing Class I & II rock3. The larger pieces of Class III shall
be placed at the bottom and against the inner slopes of Class I or II rocks. Smaller size rocks should be used to fill
the voids between the larger pieces. Rocks shall not be out of line on the faces of the bulkheads by more than 0.15
meters inward or outward.
1501.3.3 Concrete Filler shall be used to fill crevices on the inside slope of the rocks to thickness of 0.15 m. as
shown on the plans or as directed' by the Engineer. The surface shall conform to the slope. After grouting, the
surface shall be cured as specified for "Structural Concrete," Item 405 of Standard Specifications for a period of at
least 3 days.
The quantity to be paid for shall be the actual weight in tonne (Metric tons) of rocks completed in place and accepted.
Before setting in place, the quantities of rocks shall be measured in tonne by the displacement method if the method
of hauling is by water craft. The dimension in the metric system of the scows or barges used shall be taken before
and after the rocks are unloaded with the aid ofapproved gauges or graduated scales placed at the corners of the
scows or barges. The weight of rocks shall be computed from the differences of the observed displacement of the
barges when loaded and empty, and on assumed weight of the sea water of 1.025 tonne per cubic metre.Quantities
of rocks measured at the job site (and not elsewhere) sl1all be the basis of measurement for the purpose of payment
to contractor.
The weight of the rock at loading and job sites shall be determined as follows: weight (tonne) -1.025 x volume in cu.
m of displaced sea water
If the method of hauling is by dump trucks, then the actual weight can be recorded by truck scales.
It is understood and agreed that the contractor from' the time his scows or barges or trucks are measured, shall
assume full responsibility for the placing of the rocks into the bulkhead. Any rocks misplaced or dumped out of the
bulkhead alignment shall be retrieved and placed in the bulkhead or deducted from the total weight of the rocks
measured for payment, if same can be declared as not hazardous to Navigation.
Projections extending beyond the faces of the bulkheads in excess of that allowed above shall not be included.
Concrete shall no longer be measured but its volume can be fairly estimate depending on the sizes of the rocks and
shall be considered in the basis of Payment only.
Tell tales for the purpose of determining settlement may be required by the engineer but no allowance is included.
Rocks shall be paid for at the contract unit price per tonne (metric ton), which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing, hauling and placing all materials including concrete filler and for all labor equipment
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the item.
Pay Item & Description Unit of Measurement
1501 (1) Rock works, class I

tonne
rock
(2) Rock works, class II rock tonne
(3) Rock works, class III rock tonne

ITEM 1502 -FILTER MATERIALS
1502.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and placing of one or more layers of materials, eilch so graded so as to function
as an effective filter against the adjoining layers all in accordance with this specifications and conforming to the
thickness, elevations and extent shown on the plans for the purpose of preventing the erosion of fine materials
through adjoining coarser materials.
The materials shall conform to the specifications stated below, otherwise the Engineer shall require the contractor to
produce a more suitable material or add materials of such a grain size to produce the required mixture before the
work in commenced. In this case the contractor shall provide the Engineer with all necessary information as to the
composition and quality of the materials he intends to use in the filters, as well as of the materials which will be used
adjacent to the filters.
The design of a filter shall be in general be based on the following grading requirements:
d’15 : do15 shall be 12 -40 for OR 6 -18 for OK
shall be 5 -10 for SR
d'50 : do50 12 -58 for OR
9 -30 for OK
where d15 and d50 means the grain size in grading curve corresponding to 15% and 50%, respectively.
Indexo indicate the material which shall be protected
Index
indicate the filter material
'
OR means evenly graded material of round grains.
OK means evenly graded material of rough grains.
SR means unevenly graded material of rough grains.

The filter shall be laid insuch a way that the rules governing the design can be applied to any position of the filter
layer in situ.
Filter placed on the exposed slopes of areas reclaimed with dredged material shall consistof two layers, an inner
layer 80 cm. in thickness consisting of material graded according to the attached diagram and an outer. evenly
graded layer of coarser materials, 6-20 cm. in grain size, making up the total filter thickness specified on the plans.
Filter material shall be measured by the square metres of the thickness specified on the plan either in vertical or
sloping position perpendicular to the faces. Location and boundaries of the filter shall be so designated on the plan
except work on additional areas in the origirial plan which are found necessary during construction shall be measured
accordingly.
All work performed and measured as provided in the preceding section shall be paid for at the contract unit price per
square metre for filter of the specified thickness, which price shall include furnishing of labor, equipment. tools
materials, supplies and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
Number Measurement
1402 Filter Material Sq. metre
ITEM 1503 -EXCAVATION FOR BULKHEADS AND RECLAMATION

1503.1 Description
This item shall consist of the removal and disposal of unsuitable material that may be required for the construction of
the bulkheads and reclamation works. It shall include all necessary clearing and maitenance of the excavation prior
to backfilling. It shall also include removal of obstruction or parts thereof, as required. Materials such as weed, fine
silt. much and other superfluous materials are considered unsuitable material.
The seabed shall be excavated according to the cross sections shown on the plans or as established by the Engineer
with the appropriate dredges and attendant plants with which the dredge and dispose the unsuitable material at a
place shown on the plan or as directed by the Engineer an overdredging of as much as .30 m beyond the limit
required shall be paid for. In case of overdredging wherein the limits required shall be paid for.
In case of overdredging wherein the limits and slope shown on the plan or as established. by the Engineer are
exceeded by more than 0.30 m, the area shall not be backfilled with the type of material excavated but with good
sand specified for sand mattress but shall not be included in the payment.
The contractor shall submit before proceeding with the work under this item his proposed method of excavation
including drawings, and other details left open to his choice when not fully shown on the Engineer's plans. Such
method, drawings and details shall be approved by the Engineer before actual work is started under this item.
The volume of excavation will be measured by the cubic metre in its original position for materials actually excavated
as herein provided and shall be determined by computing the volume by the cross section average and area method.
The measurements shall not include the volume of additional materials removed resulting from slides, slip and silting
or filling due to the action, current, etc. or due to other causes which may be attributed to the carelessness of the
contractor.
The measurement shall not include the volume of any suitable material that maybe excavated and later used for
other purposes.
The volume measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic metre for Excavation
for Bulkness and Reclamation, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for all excavation, for
backfilling in case of overdredging in excess of the .30 m limit for surveys, for disposing of materials and materials
and for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the item.
Pay
No. & Description Unit of Measurement
Item
1503 (1) Excavation for Bulkheads and Reclamation Cubic Metre
DIVISION IV -FLOOD CONTROL, DRAINAGE AND WATER SUPPLY
PART I -WATER SUPPLY

ITEM 1600 -EXCAVATION
1600.1 Description
This item shall consist of the necessary excavation for removal of all foundation of materials of whatever nature
encountered, including all obstructions of any nature that would interfere with the proper execution and completion of
the work.
1600.2.1 General
The removal of said materials shall conform to the lines and grades shown on the approved Plans and Specifications.
Unless otherwise provided, the entire construction site shall be stripped of all vegetation and debris and such
materials shall be removed from the site prior to performing any excavation. The Contractor shall furnish. place and
maintain all supports and shoring that may be required for the sides of the excavation, and all pumping, ditching or
other approved measures for the removal or exclusion of water, including taking care of storm water and waste water
reaching the site of work from any source so as to prevent damage to the work and adjoining property.
The walls and faces of all excavation in which workers are exposed to danger from unstable ground shall be guarded
by means of shoring system, sloping of the excavation, or some other acceptable methods.
The Contractor shall furnish, install and maitain such seething, bracing, etc., as may be necassary to protect the
workers and to prevent any movement of earth which could injure or delay the work or endanger adjacent structures.
In excavation which workers may be required to enter, excavated or other materials shall be effectively stored and
retained at least 600 mm or more from the edge of the excavation and trenching operations shall conform to any and
all national, provincial and local safety requirements.
1600.2.2 Excavation Beneath Proposed Structures
Unless otherwise specified for a particular structure or ordered by the Engineer excavation shall be carried to the
grade of the bottom of the footing or slab. Where shown or ordered, areas beneath proposed structures shall be
over-excavated. After the required excavation or over-excavation has been completed, the exposed surface shall be
scarified to the depth of 150 mm brought to optimum moisture content and rolled with heavy compaction equipment
to one hundred percent (100%) of maximum density.
1600.2.3 Excavation Beneath Areas to be Paved
Excavation under areas to be paved shall extend to the bottom of the aggregate base, if such base is called for;
otherwise it shall extend to the bottom of paving. After the required excavation has been completed, the exposed
surface shall be scarified. brought to optimum moisture content, and rolled with heavy compaction equipment to one
hundred percent (100%) of maximum density.
1600.2.4 Pipeline Trench Excavation
Unless otherwise shown on the approved Plans. and Specifications or ordered by the Engineer, excavation for
pipeline shall be open-cut trenches. The bottom of the trench, including any shoring shall have a minimum width
equal to the outside diameter of the pipe plus 300 mm and a maximum width equal to the outside diameter of the
pipe plus 600 mm. except when otherwise shown or ordered by the designated/assigned Engineer, the bottom of the
trench shall be excavated uniformly to the grade of the bottom of the pipe. The trench bottom shall be given a final
trim using a string line for establishing grade, such that each pipe section when first laid will be wholly in contact with
the ground or bedding along the extreme bottom of the pipe. Rounding out the trench to form a craddle shall not be
required. The maximum amount of open trench permitted at anyone time and in one location shall be 300 metres or
the length necessary to accommodate the number of pipes installed in one day, whichever is greater. Barricades and
warning lights satisfactory'to the designated/assigned Engineer shall be provided and maintain for all trenches left
open overnight except at intersections and driveways in which case heavy steel plates, adequately braced bridges or
other type of crossing capable of supporting vehicular traffic shall be furnished as directed by the Engineer.
1600.2.5 Excavation in Lawn Areas
Where pipelines excavation occurs in lawn areas, the sod shall be carefully removed and stockpiled to preserve it for
replacement. Excavated material shall be placed on the lawn provided a drop cloth or other suitable method is
employed to protect the lawn from damage. The lawn shall not remain covered for more than 72 hours. Immediately
after completion of backfilling and testing of the pipeline, the sod shall be'replaced in a manner so as to restore the
lawn as near as possible to its original condition.
1600.2.6 Rock Excavation
Rock excavation shall include removal and disposal of the following:
· (1) all boulders measuring 0.25 cubic metre or more in volume: (2) All rock material in
ledges, bedding deposits and unstratified masses which cannot be removed without
systematic drilling and blasting,
1600.2.7 Excavation Beneath Proposed Concrete Reservoir
After the reservoir area has been stripped of all vegetation and debris. as specified in subsection (1700.2.1), lawn
and top soil from the top 600 mm of excavated soil shall be removed and stockpiled for possible later use as fill on or
around the reservoir and for miscellaneous top soil.
Excavation under the reservoir shall extend to the bottom of the draindocklayer. After such excavation had been
completed, the exposed surface shall be rolled with heavy equipment to provide a reasonably smooth surface for
placement of draindock.
The quantity to be paid for shall be the volume of the materials excavated in cubic metre calculated by multiplying the
horizontal area of the bot1om of the structure or open-cut trench by the average depth. The average depth shall be
calculated from the finished surface of the grade shown on the drawing or the original ground level, whichever is the
lowest.
Payment for all work under this item shall be made at the contract.
unit price per cubic metre for earthwork which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all
materials, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete all work.
Pay
Description Unit of
Item
Number Measurement
1600 (1) Excavation Beneath Proposed Structures Cubic metre
(2) Pipeline Trench Excavation Cubic metre
ITEM 1601 -BACKFILL AND FILL

1601.1 Description
This item shall consist of all operations required to replace excavated and unsuitable materials to fill up depression to
grade or to built up low areas in accordance with the approved Plans and Specifications.
The selected materials shall be free from grass, roots, brush, or other vegetation,or rocks having maximum
dimension larger than 150 mm.Materials placed within 150 mm of any structure Or pipe shall be free from rocks or
unbroken masses or earthly materials having maximum dimensionlarger than 75 mm.
Backfill materials shall be laid in horizontal layers, not more than 200 mm in thickness and compacted to 100 percent
of maximum density and to be carried to the level of the surrounding ground or to the lines and grades as shown on
the drawings.
Backfill shall not be placed around or upon any structure until the structure has at1ained sufficient strength to
withstand the loads imposed.Special precaution shall be taken to prevent any wedging action againstcompleted
structures or facilities. In the course of filling, any sloped surface in the excavation around structure shall be "cut into"
horizontally with every layer placed, in order to eliminate any wedge action.
Where the use of power driven compacting equipment would not be practical, layers or materials shall be compacted
by any other method which will produce the requirement for compaction.
The quantity of backfill and fill materials to be paid for under this item shall be the volume which were actually placed
and accepted and computed by the average end-area multiplied by total length.
Payment for all work under this item shall be paid at the contract price per cubic metre for Backfill and Fill, which
price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, hauling, depositing, compacting and leveling,
tools and other incidentals necessary to complete the item of work.
Number Measurement
1601 Fill and Backfill Cubic metre
ITEM 1602 -INSTALLATION OF PIPELINE

1602.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and installation of all pipes, fittings, closure pieces,bolts, nuts, gaskets, jointings
materials and appurtenances ;',. as shown and specified on the drawings, and as required by the designated!
assigned Engineer for a complete and workable piping system.
1602.2.1 Mortar Lined and Enamel or Mortar Coated Steel Pipe
· 1. General -Mortar lined and enamel or mortar coated steel pipe materials and method of
manufacture of straight pipe and pipe specials shall conform to Federal Specification SS-
P385a dated January 31, 1964 and Amendment-1 dated February 27, 1968 (herein After
referred to as "FED SPEC"), subject to the exception and supplemental requirements
contained in the following subsections.
The pipe, of the diameter and class shown, shall be furnished complete with rubber gaskets if required and all
specials and bends shall be provided as shown. For pipe 350 mm in diameter and larger, the nominal diameter
specified or shown shall be the inside diameter after lining. Pipe smaller than 350 mm in diameter may be furnishedin
standard outside diameters. Plate thickness specified or shown are nominal thickness. Shop drawings of all pipe and
specials shall also be furnished.
· 2. Cement -cement shall conform to ASTM C150 and shall be type 1 for pipe linings and
coatings.
· 3. Aggregate-aggregates shall conform to ASTM C33 to fine aggregates.
· 4. Cylinder Material -cylinder material shall be fabricated from hot rolled carbon steel
sheets or plates conforming to ASTM A570 Grades C,D or E, ASTM A283 Grade D; steel
pipe conforming to ASTM A 139 Grade B: or if approved by the designated/assigned
Engineer, high strength low-alloy steel conforming to ASTM A572 Grade 42.
· 5. Rubber Gasket -where rubber gaskets are provided, they shall be continuous ring type,
made of special composition rubber. The compound shall be of first grade natural crude,
synthetic rubber or a suitable combination thereof. The gasket shall be so formed and cured
as to be densed,homogenous, and have a smooth surface free of blisters, pit and other
imperfections. The gasket shall be of sufficient volume to fill substantially the recess provided
when the joint is assembled and shall be the sole element depended upon to make the joint
water-tight. Gaskets shall be furnished with the pipe.
The compound shall conform to the physical requirements listed below:
FED.TEST
METHOD STD.
PHYSICAL REQUIREMENT VALUE
No.601
Tensile Strength, Min. Natural Rubber 15.85 4111

MPa
Synthetic Rubber and
14.47
Combination 4111
MPa
Ultimate Elongation, percent min.
Natural 500% 4121
Synthetic & Combination 425% 4121
Shore Durometer,Type A 40-65% 3021
Compression Set,percent of Original

Deflection
Max. 20% 3111
Tensile strength after aging percent of original tensile strength, min.
(oxygen pressure test or 7111*
air heat test) 80% 7221**
* Time 48 hours temperature 70 degrees Centigrade (158 degrees F) 2.0

MPa** 96 hours at 70 degrees Centigrade (156 degrees F)
· 6. Welded Joints -where welded joints are provided, weld bell type joints maybe used, or
the .bell may be cut back, or filler rod added so as to permit field weld between the bell and
spigot joint rings.
· 7. Lining -Except where otherwise specified or shown, lining thickness shall be as follows,
with a tolerance of plus or minus twenty-five percent (25%).
Nominal Pipe Lining Thickness (mm) Diameter (mm)
under 300 6.0
300 to 400 13.0
over 400 19.0
· · 8. Coating -The coating of Steel Pipe sh<lll be of coal tar enamel or cement mortar.
The pipe smaller than 450 mm diameter shall be factory coated with coal tar enamel and bonded asbestos felt wrap
as specified in AWWA Standard for Coal Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines-Enamel and
Tape-Hot Applied (AWWA C-203).
Pipe 450 mm diameter and larger, shall be factory coated with coal-tar enamel, fibrous glass mat and bonded
asbestos felt wrap as specified in said AWWA Standard.
Coating materials and method of application shall conform to said AWWA Standard except where modified.
Except where otherwise specified or shown, coating thickness shall be 25 mm minimum. Mortar for pipe coating shall
consist of one (1) part cement to not more than three (3) parts sand by weight.
· 9. Curing
The curing periods specified in the Federal Specification are minimum periods. Curing of the Lining shall continue
until the exterior coating is applied. The ends of the pipe shall be sealed with heavy plastic sheet during and between
placement of the coating and the time the pipe is lowered into the trench. If pipe is steam-cured, recorder charts
showing temperature and duration of curing period.
· 10. Compressive Strength of Mortar

Cylinder shall be molded and tested in accordance with ASTM C39 or C109.
1602.2.2 Cast Iron Water Pipe
Bell and spigot cast iron pipe shall conform to the requirements of the following:
· 1. "Cast Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds for Water or other Liquids" (A WW A C-
1 06) or "Cast Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in SandLined Molds for Water or other Liquids"
(AWWA C-108), and as indicated in the Bid Schedules or
· 2. "ISO Recommendation R-13, Cast Iron Pipes, Special Castings and Cast Iron Parts for
Pressure Main Lines." The pipe shall be Class A, however, the hydrostatic test pressure shall
be 350 MPa for all sizes.
1602.2.3 Asbestos -Cement Water Pipe
Asbestos-cement water pipe shall C0nform to the late:;t edition of the following specifications:
· 1. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) Recommendation R-160 "Asbestos-

Cement Pressure Pipe". Subject to the following additional requirements:
· a. Classification Series II, Class 2.45 MPa
· b. Internal Hydraulic Pressure Test: A test pressure of 2.45 MPa shall be applied to each
length of pipe. The test shall be performed in accordance with ISO 160. clause 2.6.1 except
that the application and maintenance of the test pressure may iJe in -accordance with AWWA
C-400. Section 5.2.2.1, at the manufacturer's option.
· c. Longitudinal Bending Test: A longitudinal bending test shall be perfor, ned on each
length of the pipe in sizes up to 200 mm diameter when the length exceed 3.0 m. The test
shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C400 Section 5.2.3 Class
100.
· d. Transverse Crushing Test: A transverse crushing test shall be performed as specified in
ISO R160. Clause 2,6.3. The number of test shall as specified in ISO clause 4.2.3.
· e. Acceptance Test: The consignment shall be delivered with acceptance tests. as
specified in ISO R160 Section 4, subject to the additional requirements included herein.
· f. Manufacturer's Certificate: The manufacturer shall supply the owner with a certificate
showing that the pipe has been tested in accordance with. and satisfies the requirements of
the specification as modified herein.
· g. Pipe Joints: The tolerance on dimensions of pipe and couplings.
as well as the dimensions and specitications of rubber jointing rings, shall be such that an Internal hydraulic pressure
of 2.45 MPa can be maintained without leakage when the pipes are set at the maximum angular deviation indicated
by the manufacturer of the pipe.
1602.2.4 PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Pipe
· 1. Pipe shall conform to the requirements of "AWWA Standard for Polyvinyl Q;hloride
(PVC) Pressure Pipe", 100 mm through 300 mm diame,ter (AWWA C-900) and shall be
pressure class 100 or 150 where shown 01;1 the drawings and as indicated in the Bid
Schedule. The pipe shall have steel pipe equivalent or cast iron equivalent outside
dimensions and furnished with rubber ring gasket joints.
Alternate outside diameter and wall thickness shown in the tabulation will be allowed for the specified pressure class.
1602.2.5 Polyethelene (PE) Plastic Pipe
· 1. Polyethelene pipe shall be manufactured from Type IV, Class C, Grade P34 extrusion
compound as defined by ASTM 01248 with a hydrostatic design stress of 4.3 MPa. Alternate
polyethelene pipe extrusion compound PE 3408 according to the Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI)
with a hydrostatic design stress of 5.50 MPa may be used. All compound used shall be virgin
plastic. Clean rework material from the manufacturer's own pipe production may be used so
long as the original was virgin material and of the same type, class and grade as required
above. The pipe shall meet the requirements of the National Sanitation Foundation for potable
water use as tested by the National Institute of Science and Technology (NIST) or other
testing laboratories and shall be made from nontoxic, non-lead baserj plasticiser approved by
the Project Engineer.
· 2. Pipe dimension when measured to the methods as described in ASTM 02122,
polyethelene pipe shall conform to either of the following dimension depending on the type of
extrusion compound used as stipulated! above:
Extrusion Compound, Type IV, Class C, Grade P34 (according to ASTM
01248)
· Outside Wall Thickness
Nominal
Diameter Thickness (min.
Size (mm)
) mm (max.)
(mm)
75 90 8.18 9.30
100 110 10.00 11.36
150 160 14.55 16.53
200 225 20.45 23.34
· 3. All polyethelene Pipes shall be rated for use with water at 23 degrees C and at a
minirnum working pressure of 1.10 MPa.
· 4. All PE pipes shall be Ciea'ily markedat inferval 01 notmore than 1.0 lineal metre with
nominal size, type of material, manufacturer's trade name and production code.
1602.3.1 Mortar Lines and Enamel or Mortar Coated Steel Pipe
· 1. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall furnish and install all pipes, specials,
fittings, closures, pieces, values, supports, bolts.nuts. gaskets; jointing materials and all other
appurtenances as shown and as required to provide a complete and workable
installation.Where pipe support details are shown. the support shall conform thereto and shall
be placed as Indicated; provided, that the support for all exposed piping shall be complete
and adequate regardless of whether or not supporting devices are specifically shown.
Concrete thrust blocks. anchor blocks or welded joints shall be provided at all junctions,
changes in direction exceeding 11-1/2 degrees or whereotherwise shown. At all times when
the work of installing pipe is not in progress, all openings into the pipe and at the ends of the
pipe in trenches or structures shall be kept tightly closed to prevent entrance of animals and
foreign materials. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent the pipe from
floating due to water entering the trench from any source, shall assume full responsibility for
any damages due to this cause and shall at his own expense restore and replace the pipe to
its specified condition and grade if it is displaced due to floating. The Contractor shall maintain
the inside of the pipe free from foreign materials and in a clean and sanitary condition until its
acceptance by the Owner.
· 2. Trenches shall be in a reasonably dry condition when the pipe is laid. Necessary facilities
including slings shall be provided for lowering and properly placing the pipe section in the
trench without damage.The pipe sections shall be laid to the line and grade when shown and
they shall be closely jointed to form a smooth flow line.Immediately before placing each
section of pipe in final position for joining, the bedding for the pipe shall be checked for
firmness and uniformity of surface.
1602.3.2 Cast Iron Water Pipe
Cast iron and fitting shall be lined with cement mortar in accordance with the requirement of the "Standard for
Installation of Cast Iron Water Mains" (AWWA C-600).
1602.3.3 Asbestos -Cement Water Pipe
Asbestos-cement pipe shall be installed in accordance with the "Standard for Installation of Asbestos-Cement Water
Pipe" (AWWA C603), except that the pipe shall not be laid using earth mounds.
Prior to installation, the asbestos-cement pipe and couplings and all rubber rings shall be inspected for damages and
defects in materials and workmanship. All damaged or defective materials shall be rejected and removed from the
jobsite.
Joints between asbestos-cement pipe to cast-iron valves and fittings shall be sealed with rubber ring gaskets. After
assembling the joint, the position of the rubber ring gaskets shall be located at even distance from the face of the
valve or fitting, for the full circumference of the pipe.
1602.3.4 PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Pipe
After a section of a pipe has been lowered into the prepared trench and immediately before joining the pipe, the ends
of the pipe to be joined shall be cleaned, and tHe rubber gasket lubricated, with a vegetable compound soap all in
accordance with the pipe manufacturer's instructions.Assembly of. the pipe length shall be in accordance with the
recommendation of the manufacturer of the type of the joint use, All special tools and appliances required for joining
the pipe shall be provided by the Contractor. When cutting or machining of the pipe is necessary, only tools and
methods recommended by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the Engineer shall be employed.
1602.3.5 PE (Polyethelene) Plastic Pipe
All PE pipes when supplied under the specification shall be joined employing either of the following methods:
Butt-Fusion
When pipe supplied under this specification are installed and joined by this method, the work shall be carried out only
by well qualified personnel who adhere strictly to prescribed working conditions using tools and procedures
recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
· a. Equipment -the equipment needed shall be as described in ASTM D-2657.

· b. General Procedure -The following procedures shall be followed when making butt-fusion
joint:
· 1. Wipe each pipe-end-clean, inside and outside to remove dirt, water, grease and other
foreign material.
· 2. Square the end of each pipe section to be fused using a fusing tool. Remove cuttings
and burns from pipe ends.
· 3. Check line-up of pipe-ends in fusion machine to see that pipe ends meet squarely and
completely over the entire surface to be fused. Two clamps should be used on each end of
pipe to be fused for sizes 100 mm and above.
· 4. Insert the heater plate between the aligned pipe ends. Bring and hold the pipes ends in
contact and allow pipe to heat and soften until a bead of molten plastic roll back from the
ends. This bead will be about 1.5 mm to 5.0 mm back from the end of the pipe depending on
size. Soften approximately 1.50 mm on all sizes up to 75 mm. On 75 mm to 150 mm heat to
5.0 mm.Softening can be judged by the appearance of the pipe end as the material softens.
Both surfaces of the heater plate shall be cleaned and the temperature maintained at 246
degrees C to 260 degrees C (475 degrees F to 500 degrees F.)
· 5. Carefully remove the pipe ends from the heater plate and remove the plate. If the
softened material sticks to the heater plate, discontinue the joint. Clean heater plate, resquare
pipe end and start over.
· 6. Bring the heated pipe ends together with the specified pressure to form a uniform double
head about 3.0 mm to 5.0 mm wide around the entire circumference of the pipe.
· 7. Allow the joint to cool and solidify while maintaining the pressure for the specified time.
Inspect the joint for a uniform non-porous appearance. If the joint appears faulty, cut the joint
out and repeat the procedure.
The quantity to be paid under this item shall be the length in metres of pipes in place completed and accepted,
measured from end to end of the pipeline~
The quantity determined as provided above, shall be paid for or the contract price per metre for pipe actually installed
and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and installation of all pipes, fittings, closure pieces,
bolts, nuts, gaskets, jointing materials and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
work.
Pay Item No. and Name Unit of Measurement
1602-1Mortar lined and coated steel

enamel Mortar
pipe
1602-2Cast Iron Water pipe metre
1602-3Asbestos-cement water pipe metre
1602-4PVC Polyvinyl Chloride pipe metre
1602-5 Polyethelene (PE) Plastic pipe metre
ITEM 1603 -INSTALLATION OF VALVES

1603.1 Description
This item shall consist of the installation of valves in accordance with the plans/drawings as directed by the Engineer.
All materials shall conform to AWWA and ISO specification for valve installation.
Valves shall be installed as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. All valves shall be new and of current
manufacture.
Flanged valves may be raised or plain faced with serrated gasket surface. Flanges of valves for water working
pressure of 1.20 MPa or less shall be faced and drilled to 560 N American Standard dimension;
Flanges of valves for water working pressure greater than 1.20 MPa shall be faced and drilled to 1120 N American
Standard dimension.
Each valve body shall be tested under a test pressure equal to twice its design working pressure, except that gate
valve shall be tested in accordance with "STANDARD GATE VALVES FOR ORDINARY WATERWORKS
SERVICES" (AWWA-C 500)
All buried valves shall be provided with an exterior protective coating.
When operating out of a buried valve is located more than 1.50 metres below ground surface. as extension shall be
Installed in the valve box.
The bottom of the extension shall be securely fastened to the operating nut of the valve and tile top of the extension
shall be centered in the valve box.
To permit operation of all buried valves regardless of depth. six (6) tee-handle valve keys of sufficient length shall be
furnished.
Valves shall be inspected in opened and closed position to ensure that all parts are in good working condition,
otherwise it will be replaced prior to installation. It shall alsb have the interior cleaned of all foreign materials before
installation.
The work to be paid item shall be the installation and the number of pieces installed.
Item and Description
Valve
Unit of Measurement
per piece
PART J -FLOOD CONTROL AND DRAINAGE

Part I-A -Earthwork
ITEM 1700 -CLEARING AND GRUBBING

Refer to ITEM 100, Part C, Volume II
ITEM 1701 -CHANNEL EXCAVATION

1701.1 Description
This item shall consist of excavation. removal and trimming of all classes of materials in channel prism including
placing or stockpiling of excavated suitable materials and disposal of unsuitable or surplus materials to designated
disposal areas all in accordance with these Specifications and Plans or as established by the designated/assigned
Engineer.
· a) Where applicable, the Contractor shall excavate only after the area of operation has
been cleared and grubbed. The contractor must exercise care not to extend his excavation
beyond the right-of-way limits called for in the Plans. Excavation operations shall be such that
all materials suitable for embankment or backfilling and filling shall be separated from
objectionable materials which shall be disposed. All surface from excavation shall be trimmed
to the required slopes and grades within the specified tolerances provided hereto.
· b) Tolerance Excavation sections, profiles and slopes shall be cut true and straight in
conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Plans within the following tolerances, as
measured normal to the excavated surfaces;
Item Tolerances
1. Profile of invert channels + 30 mm
2. SidEf slopes inside channel prism + 15 mm
3. Side slopes outside channel
+ 15 mm
prism
· · c) Channel shall be excavated with the use of a appropriate mechanized excavating
equipment approved by the designated/assigned Engineer.
Channel excavation will be measured by volume in cubic metre of material excavated from the channel prism to the
neat lines and grades as shown on the Plans and as established by the Engineer.
Hauling of excavated materials either for stockpiling or disposal to disposal areas including trimming of side slopes in
channel prism and channel bed shall be considered subsidiary works under this item.
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 1601.3 shall be paid for at the contract unit price for
each of the Pay Items listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities. The price and, payment shall be full
compensation for the removal and disposal of the excavated materials including all labor, equipment, tools and
incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this item.
Pay Item Unit of
Number Description Measurement
1601 (1) Unsuitable Excavation Cubic metre
1601 (2) Surplus Common Excavation Cubic metre
1601 (3) Surplus Rock Cubic metre
1601 (4) Surplus Unclassified Excavation Cubic metre
ITEM 1702 -STRUCTURE EXCAVATION

Refer to Item 103, Part C, Volume II (Blue Book)
ITEM 1703 -DREDGING

1703.1 -Description
This item shall consist of the excavation of river beds, bottom of creeks or esteros, and other bodies of water for the
purpose of deepening or removal of unsuitable soil layers and disposal of same at areas shown on the Plans or as
established by the Engineer.
1703.2.1 Construction Surveys and Reference Elevation
All elevations shall be referred to the datum plane specified on the Plans.
A pre-construction survey shall be undertaken by the Conractor under the control of the Engineer to confirm that the
work has been executed to the prescribed lines and grades at regular intervals of time which serve as a basis for the
computation of the actual volume of dredging materials.
1703.2.2 Equipment
The Contractor shall provide and mobilize at the jobsite the minimum number and type of dredging equipment
specified in the information to Bidders.
Equipment necessary for the proper prosecution of the work shall be in good working condition and shall have been
approved by the Engineer, both as to type and condition, before the commencement of the construction the
Contractor shall at all times provide sufficient equipment with corresponding experienced operators to enable
continuous prosecution of the work and its completion at the required contract time.
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with boats, boatmen, laborers. materials necessary for his inspection of the
progres of the work and the measurement of the work completed.
Where the actual field condition so requires. addtional adequate equipment shall also be provided by the Contractor.
1703.2.3 Execution of the Work
The dredging work shall start at the downstream section of the project and shall be undertaken by the Contractor
within the limits shown on the Plans and in accordance with the Specifications and approved work schedule.
1703.2.4 Materials to be Dredged
If the dredged materials are scheduled to be used as fill material, any remarkable change in the quality of the
dredged materials shall be reported to the Engineer to obtain appropriate direction.
1703.2.5 Dredging Tolerances (Over depth)
The dredging shall be executed according to the depth or elevations indicated on the Plans. No elevation higher than
the elevation indicated shall be tolerated.
An allowance of 200 mm shall be acceptable for overdredging, but in no case shall the entire dredging area shall be
dredged to allowable 200 mm tolerance. All quantities due to overdredging shall be at the Contractor's expense.
In case of excessive overdredging (beyond the 200 mm tolerance) the Contractor shall on his account backfill the
overdredged areas and/or takes all necessary measures as approved by the Engineer to protect the stability of
nearby structures.
1703.2.6 Dredging Slopes
All dredging slopes shall be to the specified gradient and within the limits.specified.on the approved Plans.
1703.2.7 Dredging Channels and Basins
The dredging operation shall start at the downstream reaches moving towards the upstream reaches as practicble as
possible. The theoretical boundaries of dredging are shown on the approved Plans. The dredging shall be carried out
to the specified depth with the permissible overdredging specified in Sub-Section 1603.2.5.
The preferred degree of slope between the original bottom and the indicated dredging level is 1. (vertical) to 4
(horizontal) for layers of clay and 1 to 6 for layer of sand and silty sand and 1 to 10 for layers of mud or silt.
After dredging the river to the prescribed lines and grades, river banks shall be trimmed manually to the lines and
grades shown on the plans or as extablished by the Engineer.
1703.2.8 Dredging Adjacent River Training Structures
In addition to the requirements mentioned in Subsection 1603.2.7 the maximum permissibleoverdredging is 200 mm.
The contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety of any permanent structures on the subject area.
1703.2.9 Disposal of Spoils
To accomodate the dredged materials, small dikes and drainage system shall be constructed in the approved spoil
bank area. The spoil bank and the open drainage channel shall be provided in the high water channel to facilitate the
flow of water from the dredged material to the river. Where needed, a drainage stilling basin shall be provided to
minimize draining out of the dredged soil material with the effluent through the drainage channel of the river.
During dredging operations, precautionary measures shall be observed to avoid the destruction of small dikes due to
water seepage or overtopping of the dike. The dredged materials shall be deposited as flat as possible within the
spoil bank area.
Dredging will be measured by cubic metre of the quantity actually dredged from the original river bed to the neat lines
and grades as shown on the Plans and as established by the Engineer subject to the conditions of Subsections
1703.2.5 Dredging Tolerances.
1703.2.11 Basis of Payment
The cost of dredging shall be paid based on the computed volume of dredged materials multiplied by the contract unit
price for the particular pay item shown on the Bid Schedule. which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for dredging, handling and disposal including labor, equipment. tools and incidentals necessary to
complete this item.
Number Measurement
Dredging-
1603 (1) Cubic Metre
soils
Unless otherwise specified, no fill materials shall be placed and no compaction shall be permitted to adjacent to
concrete for fourteen (14) days after placement of concrete. Compaction of backfilling material palced above burried
concrete, however, shall not be permitted to be carried out with vibration except with the prior approval of the
Engineer.
Trial Embankment
Before filling is stated, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer the equipment and performance for
spreading and compacting at least three (3) imposed layers of soil in which test of standard and filled compaction
shall be conducted. When different kind of soils are encountered during the course of subsequent work when further
trials shall be conducted.
Moisture Content Adjustment
The water content of earthfill materials, prior to and during compaction, shall be disturbed uniformly througllout each
layer of material. As far as practicable. the material shall be brought to the proper moisture content to ensure
adequate compaction effect in the excavation or borrow areas.Supplementary watering or drying may be carried out
on the embankment. and such wetted or dried soil shall be the roughly mixed to attain uniform moisture content
distribution before compaction.
When each layer of material has been conditioned to have a moisture content in the required range, it shall be
compacted by the use of such equipment of sheepsfoot roller, rubber tired or other approved roller as may be
necessary to attain the compaction specified.
Soil Test
The owner shall provide all the testing equipment and apparatus necessary to carry out various soil test. the
Contractor shall shoulder all expenses incurred for carrying out said soil test including the provision for the testing
laboratory. all the testing staff, laborer and consumables necessary for carrying out his test. All test result in the form
of report shall be furnished to the Owner. The Contractor is obliged to follow the result of the tests.
Expenses for extra soil test ordered by the Engineer for his own purpose shall be barned by the Owner. However,
obtaining samples and transporting of the same to tile laboratory shall be borne by the Contractor.
The test to be performed by the Contractor prior to the commencement of the earthwork and every time when the
said characteristic’s changes., shall include the following:
· (a) Field Density (unit weight) Test

· (b) Compaction Test
· (c) Particle size distribution test
· (d) Specific gravity
· (e) Moisture content test
· (f) Liquid limit and plastic limit test
· (g) Direct shear test or triaxial compression test
The field moisture content of the compacted fill shall be made at least once per 4000 to 6000 cubic meters of earthfill.
The Engineer shall prepare soil test programme depending on the quality of the Contractor's earthwork operation
schedule.
Should test results prove that changes in the embankment material are necessary in order to obtain the prescribed
compacted fill, these changes of obtaining of suitable material shall be at the Contractor's expense.
Measurement shall be done in cubic metre of embankment in its final accepted compacted position (less the volume
for gravel metal) regardless of the origin of the material and the required degree of compaction.
The volume measured, regardless of the type of the embankment or origin of materials whether from channel
excavation. dredging, sideborrow, borrow haul or from overhaul, as provided above shall be paid at the contract Unit
Price per cubic metre which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for any side borrow, borrow haul
and overhaul operation made stripping of foundations (where necessary) spreading, blending, moisture condtioning
and compaction and trimming of side slopes (where necessary including all labor, tools, equipment and all incidentals
and subsidiary works, necessary for the successfull of the work described under this item. Provided, however, tbat
payment shall only be made after presentation by the Contractor of a certification issued by the DPWH Materials
Testing Engineer to the effect that the constructed embankment measured and covered by such progress payment
has attained the required degree of compaction.
ITEM 1705 -FILL AND BACKFILL
ITEM 1706 -HAULING AND DISPOSAUOVERHAUL
Refer to ITEM 107, Part C, Volume" (Blue Book)
ITEM 1707 -AGGREGATE SUBBASE COURSE
Refer to ITEM 200, Part C, Volume II (Blue Book)
ITEM 1708 -AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
Refer to ITEM 201, Part C, Volume" (Blue Book)
ITEM 1709 -CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
Refer to ITEM 202, Part C, Volume II (Blue Book)
PART I-B -BANK AND SLOPE PROTECTION WORKS
ITEM 1710 -RIPRAP ANDGROUTED RIPRAP
Refer to ITEM 504, Part G, Volume" (Blue Book)
ITEM 1711 -STONE MASONRY
Refer to ITEM 505, Part G, Volume II (Blue Book)
ITEM 1712 -CONCRETE SLOPE PROTECTION
ITEM 1713 -RUBBLE CONCRETE I SAND OR STONE MASONRY
ITEM 1714 -GABIONS
Refer to ITEM' 509, Part G, Volume II (Blue Book)
ITEM 1715 -FILTER FABRIC
Refer to ITEM 1404
ITEM 1716 -PILING
Refer to ITEM 400, Part F, Volume" (Blue Book)
ITEM 1717 -SHEET PILES
PART I-C -DRAINAGE WORKS
ITEM 1718 -PIPE CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS
ITEM 1719 -UNDERDRAINS
ITEM 1720 -MANHOLES, INLETS AND CATCH BASINS
ITEM 1721 -CLEANING AND RECONDITIONING EXISTING DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
ReIer to ITEM 503, Part G, Volume II (Blue Book)

DPWH Blue Book Version 3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DPWH Blue Book Version 3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY BONIFACIO DRIVE, PORT

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR

REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES

1018 -Ceramic Tiles 78

1019 -Wood Tiles : 82

1020 -Vinyl Floor Tiles 84

1021 -Cement Floor Finish 86

1022 -Stucco Finish 88

1023 -Granolithic Marb[e Work 90

1024 -Pea Gravel Washout Finish 91

1025 -Bush Hammered Finish 93

1026 -Pebble Washout Finish 95

1027 -Cement Plaster Finish 98

1028 -Synthetic Adobe 100

1029 -Granatite Washout Finish 102

1030 -Accoustical Ceiling 104

1031 -Accoustical Treatment 106

1032 -Painting. Varnishing and Other Related

PART D ELECTRICAL 113

ITEM 801 -REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS

ITEM 802 – EXCAVATION

ITEM 803 – STRUCTURE EXCAVATION

ITEM 804 – EMBANKMENT

Sheet Pile Walls 3m 20m

Payment Item Description Pay Unit

805 (1) Dredging – soils m3

ITEM 806 -RECLAMATION

806.2 Materials Requirements

806.3 Construction Requirements

806.4 Method of Measurement

806.5 Basis of Payment

Pay Item No and Description Unit of Measurement

Reclamation Cubic Metre

PART B -PLAIN AND REINFORCED

900.2 Materials Requirements

Bars for concrete Reinforcement AASHTO M 31

Deformed A x b -Steel and Plain Bars for Concrete

Bar and rod mats for concrete

Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for (ASTM A 82)

concrete reinforcement AASHTO M 32

Welded steel wire fabric (ASTM A 185)

Wire and Strands for

concrete ASTM A 421

Tensile strength fs' 1000 MPa

Yield strength (0.2 offset) 0.90 fs'

Elongation at rupture in 20 diameter 4 percent

Reduction of area at rupture 25 percent

Structural steel ASTM A 36

Steel Pipe for concrete-filled pipe columns ASTM A 53

Cast-Iron Pipe for composite columns ASTM A 377

900.3 Construction Requirements

Maximum permissible water-cement ratio

Specified compressive Non air-entrained concrete Air-entrained concrete

2500 7¼ 0.642 6¼ 0.554

3000 6½ 0.576 5¼ 0.465

3500 5¾ 0.510 4½ 0.399

4000 5 0.443 4 0.354

900.3.3 Concrete Proportions and Consistency

900.4 Concrete Surface Finishing: General

900.5 Curing Concrete (See subsection 407)

900.7 Method of Measurement

900.8 Basis of Payment